utopia controls
TRANSCRIPT
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
© Hitachi, Ltd. 2007. All rights reserved.TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Technical catalogueRemote controls
CSC-5S
Catálogo técnico
�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. FEATURESANDBENEFITS..................................................................13
1.1. Introduction.............................................................................................13
1.2. Remotecontrolgroups...........................................................................14
1.3. Individualremotecontrols.......................................................................15
1.4. Centralremotecontrols..........................................................................19
1.5. ComputerisedCentralRemoteControls(BMS)......................................22
2. INDIVIDUALREMOTECONTROLS.......................................................27
2.1. PC-P2HTE..............................................................................................27
2.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................27
2.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................272.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................28
2.1.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................28
2.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................29
2.1.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................292.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................292.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................302.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................302.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................312.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................32
2.1.4. Operation................................................................................................32
2.1.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................332.1.4.2.Operationmodeselectionprocedure.................................................................34
2.1.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................40
2.1.5.1.PC-P2HTEcommandfunctions..........................................................................402.1.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................412.1.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................44
2.1.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................49
2.1.6.1.Abnormaltransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandindoorunit..................492.1.6.2.Troubleshootingprocedureforunitsconnectedtotheremotecontrol................492.1.6.3.Troubleshootingoncheckmode.........................................................................512.1.6.4.Checkingprocedureforeachmaincomponent..................................................592.1.6.5.Remotecontrolself-checkingprocedure............................................................62
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents
2.1.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................64
2.1.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................642.1.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................64
2.2. PC-P1HE................................................................................................67
2.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................67
2.2.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................672.2.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................68
2.2.2. Dimensiondetails...................................................................................68
2.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................69
2.2.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................692.2.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................692.2.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................702.2.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................702.2.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................712.2.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................72
2.2.4. Operation................................................................................................72
2.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................732.2.4.2.OperationModeSelectionProcedure................................................................74
2.2.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................78
2.2.5.1.PC-P1HEcommandfunctions............................................................................782.2.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................792.2.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................82
2.2.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................87
2.2.6.1.Abnormaltransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandindoorunit..................872.2.6.2.Troubleshootingprocedureforunitsconnectedtotheremotecontrol................872.2.6.3.Troubleshootingoncheckmode.........................................................................892.2.6.4.Checkingprocedureforeachmaincomponent..................................................972.2.6.5.Remotecontrolself-checkingprocedure............................................................100
2.2.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................102
2.2.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1022.2.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................102
CSC-5S
Catálogo técnico
5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
2.3. PC-P5H1E..............................................................................................107
2.3.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................107
2.3.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1072.3.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................107
2.3.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................108
2.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................108
2.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1082.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1092.3.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1092.3.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1092.3.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................110
2.3.4. Electricalconnection...............................................................................112
2.3.4.1Standardelectricalconnection...........................................................................1122.3.4.2Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1122.3.4.3.Testingprocedure...............................................................................................113
2.3.5. Operation................................................................................................115
2.3.6. OptionalFunctions..................................................................................116
2.3.7. Alarmindication......................................................................................117
2.3.8. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories......................................................119
2.3.8.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1192.3.8.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................119
2.4. PC-P5H..................................................................................................123
2.4.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................123
2.4.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1232.4.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................123
2.4.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................124
2.4.3. Installation..............................................................................................124
2.4.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1242.4.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1252.4.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1252.4.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................126
2.4.4. Electricalconnection...............................................................................127
2.4.4.1.Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1272.4.4.2.Checkingprocedure...........................................................................................129
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents
2.4.5. Operation................................................................................................130
2.4.5.1.Description........................................................................................................1302.4.5.2.Start....................................................................................................................1302.4.5.3.Stop....................................................................................................................130
2.4.6. OptionalFunctions..................................................................................131
2.4.7. Alarmindication......................................................................................132
2.4.8. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................134
2.4.8.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1342.4.8.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................134
2.5. WirelessRemoteControl........................................................................135
2.5.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................135
2.5.3. Installation..............................................................................................136
2.5.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................1362.5.3.2.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1372.5.3.3.Batterycharging.................................................................................................1372.5.3.4.Receiverkit.........................................................................................................1382.5.3.5.Wallinstallation...................................................................................................139
2.5.4. Operation................................................................................................139
2.5.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1402.5.4.2.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................1412.5.4.3.Operationwithseveralindoorunits....................................................................142
2.5.5. Testmodewiththeremotecontrol..........................................................145
2.5.6. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories......................................................146
2.5.6.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1462.5.6.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................146
2.5.7. PC-RLH8receiverkitinstallation............................................................147
2.5.7.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1472.5.7.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1472.5.7.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1482.5.7.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1482.5.7.5.Optionalfunctions...............................................................................................151
2.5.8 PC-RLH9receiverkitinstallation............................................................152
2.5.8.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1522.5.8.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1522.5.8.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1532.5.8.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1532.5.8.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................155
CSC-5S
Catálogo técnico
7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
2.5.9. PC-RLH11receiverkitinstallation..........................................................156
2.5.9.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1562.5.9.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1562.5.9.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1572.5.9.4.Installationprocedure........................................................................................1572.5.9.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................160
2.5.10.PC-RLH13receiverkitinstallation...........................................................161
2.5.10.1.Safetysummary................................................................................................1612.5.10.2.Installationsiteselection...................................................................................1612.5.10.3.Supplycontent..................................................................................................1622.5.10.4.Installationprocedure.......................................................................................1622.5.10.5.Optionalfunctions.............................................................................................165
3. CENTRALREMOTECONTROLS..........................................................169
3.1. PSC-5S...................................................................................................169
3.1.1.Generaldetails...........................................................................................169
3.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1693.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................170
3.1.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................170
3.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................171
3.1.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1713.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1723.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1723.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1723.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1733.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................174
3.1.4. Operation................................................................................................179
3.1.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1793.1.4.2.OperationModeSelectionProcedure................................................................180
3.1.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................183
3.1.5.1.Inputandoutputfunctions..................................................................................1833.1.5.2.Controlinternalfunctions....................................................................................187
3.1.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................188
3.1.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................1883.1.6.2.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................189
3.1.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................191
3.1.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1913.1.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................191
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
8 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents
3.2. CSC-5S..................................................................................................195
3.2.1. Generaldetails......................................................................................195
3.2.2. Dimensiondetails...................................................................................196
3.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................196
3.2.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1963.2.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1973.2.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1973.2.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1973.2.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1983.2.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................199
3.2.4 Operation................................................................................................202
3.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2023.2.4.2.Remotecontrols.................................................................................................2033.2.4.3.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................203
3.2.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................207
3.2.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................208
3.2.6.1.Chillerunitcheckingprocedure..........................................................................2083.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................2103.2.6.3.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................211
3.2.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................213
3.2.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................2133.2.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................213
3.3. PSC-5T...................................................................................................217
3.3.1. GeneraldetailsSelectionadvantages....................................................217
3.3.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................218
3.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................218
3.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2183.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2193.3.3.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2203.1.3.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................2233.3.3.5.DIPswitchadjustment........................................................................................224
3.3.4. Operation................................................................................................225
3.3.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2253.3.4.2.Operationmodeselectionprocedure.................................................................226
3.3.5. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................229
CSC-5S
Catálogo técnico
�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
4. COMPUTERISEDCENTRALREMOTECONTROLS............................233
4.1. HARC-BXE............................................................................................233
4.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................233
4.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................2334.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................2334.1.1.3.Systemconfiguration..........................................................................................234
4.1.2. Installation..............................................................................................241
4.1.2.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2414.1.2.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2414.1.2.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2424.1.2.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................242
4.1.3. Operation................................................................................................247
4.1.3.1.Testmode...........................................................................................................2474.1.3.2.BMSconnection.................................................................................................2484.1.3.3.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................248
4.1.4. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................249
4.1.4.1.HARC-BXEself-check......................................................................................2494.1.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2504.1.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................251
4.2. HARC-70CE1.........................................................................................255
4.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................255
4.2.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................2554.2.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................2554.2.1.3.Systemconfiguration..........................................................................................256
4.2.2. Installation..............................................................................................262
4.2.2.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2624.2.2.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2624.2.2.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2634.2.2.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................263
4.2.3. Operation................................................................................................265
4.2.3.1.Checkmode.......................................................................................................2654.2.3.2.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................265
4.2.4. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................266
4.2.4.1.HARC-70CE1(OP)self-check.........................................................................2664.2.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2674.2.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................268
Table of contentsTechnical catalogue
10 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
11TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. FEATURES AND BENEFITS ...............................1�
1.1. Introduction .........................................................1�
1.2. Remote control groups ........................................1�
1.�. Individual remote controls ...................................15
PC-P2HTE .....................................................15
PC-P1HE .......................................................1�
PC-P5H1E (PC-ARH) ....................................17
PC-P5H ..........................................................17
PC-LH�A Wireless Remote Control ...............18
1.�. Central remote controls .......................................1�
PSC-5S ..........................................................1�
CSC-5S ..........................................................20
PSC-5T ..........................................................21
1.5. Computerised Central Remote Controls (BMS)...22
HARC-BX E ...................................................22
HARC-70CE1 .................................................22
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
12 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
1. FEATURES AND BENEFITS
1.1. Introduction
• REMOTE CONTROL TYPES
- Hitachi air conditioning remote controls are divided into four types depending on the different methods of controlling both indoor and outdoor units. According to this criteria, they are divided into:
- Individual remote controls: which control each unit separately.- Central remote controls: which centralise the control of several units at one point in the office.- Building air conditioning control (CSNET WEB): not included in this technical catalogue.- Intelligent building (BMS - Building Management System): which unify the control of all the systems
installed in the building, including the air conditioning system.
������������������������������������������������������������
���������������
���������
��������������
������������������
Fig. 1 Control hierarchy
- Depending on how the system is configured, it is possible to control lower level remote controls with higher level remote controls.
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
1� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
1.2. Remote control groups
Different types of remote controls will be used depending on the number of units to be controlled.
• Individual remote controls
Recommended for controlling a small number of units.
• Central remote controls
- Recommended when you want to control several units distributed throughout a whole floor of a building.- Where necessary, the central remote control can control up to two floors separately.- For such cases, the indoor units should be grouped in remote control groups with a maximum of 1� units in
each group.• CSNET WEB
- Recommended when you want to control more than two floors that need to be separately controlled.- The CSNET WEB can be installed at any point of the building. It includes a touch screen for centralised
control of the building.- The CSNET WEB system is accessible from any computer in the building which is connected to the same
network and configured to used it.• BMS
- Recommended for use in an intelligent building with an integral control system (building automation, security, access, etc.).
- The BMS uses a LonWorks information transmission protocol.- The use of the BMS restricts the use of the LON (Local Operating Network) exclusively to the building's
control room.
Table of contents
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
15TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
1.3. Individual remote controls
PC-P2HTE
Fig. 2 PC-P2HTE Remote control
- Remote control with timer and temperature sensor.- Excellent display thanks to a large sized LCD screen, facilitating both programmable variable and possible
alarm indication readings.- Allows all indoor unit functions to be selected and changed.- Optimum air conditioning control with its weekly timer.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.
There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.
- Just one remote control can control up to 1� indoor units. - Operation lock procedure to avoid incorrect use of the buttons.- Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time
when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.
• Operation Mode:
- “COOL” for cooling, “HEAT” for heating, “DRY” for dehumidification and “FAN” for ventilation.
• “VENTI” Option:
- VENTI: only activates the KPI unit.- A/C: only activates the Air Conditioning unit.- A/C+VENTI: activates both at the same time, also allowing a forced delay of �0’ or 1 h when you want to
increase the equipment's energy savings.
• Additional functions:
- Weekly timer.- Defrosting, frost protection.- Clogged filter alarm.
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
1� TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
PC-P1HE
Fig. 3 PC-P1HE Remote control
- Remote control with start / stop timer and temperature sensor.- Excellent display thanks to a large sized LCD screen, facilitating both programmable variable and possible
alarm indication readings.- Allows all indoor unit functions to be selected and changed.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.
There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.
- Just one remote control can control up to 1� indoor units. - Operation lock procedure to avoid incorrect use of the buttons.- Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time
when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.
• Operation Mode:
- “COOL” for cooling, “HEAT” for heating, “DRY” for dehumidification and “FAN” for ventilation.
• “VENTI” Option:
- VENTI: only activates the KPI unit.- A/C: only activates the Air Conditioning unit.- A/C+VENTI: activates both at the same time, also allowing a forced delay of �0’ or 1 h when you want to
increase the equipment's energy savings.
• Additional functions:
- Defrosting, frost protection.- Clogged filter alarm.
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
17TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
PC-P5H1E (PC-ARH)
Fig. 4 PC-P5H1E Remote control
- Operation mode selection.- Large sized LCD screen. - New optional functions.- Smaller remote control than conventional models.- Easy to use and therefore perfect for installations used by various different people. - Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.- Operation mode lock option.- Louver can be selected.- Louver can be selected.- Adjustable temperature limit.- Remote sensor.
PC-P5H
Fig. 5 PC-P5H Remote control
- Smaller remote control than conventional models.- Easy to use and therefore perfect for installations used by various different people.- Malfunction or problem warnings with alarm code indications.
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
18 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
PC-LH3A Wireless Remote Control
Fig. 6 PC-LH3A Remote control
- Wireless remote control that requires no wiring and provides simple one-touch operation. - Same remote control for all the units.- Each unit has its own receiver.- Two or more units can be controlled simultaneously.
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
1.4. Central remote controls
PSC-5S
Fig. 7 PSC-5S Remote control
- 1� indoor unit groups can be connected, with 1 main remote control connected to a H-LINK on each group that can control up to a maximum of 128 indoor units.
- UP to 8 central remote controls (PSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.- Compatible with all the RCS and Timers.- In addition to the basic functions, operation mode and temperature setting, the air flow and automatic louver
can also be adjusted.- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the
error. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.- Also includes the option of receiving and sending external signals, along with the option to connect with the PSC-5T timer.
- The external signals control the following functions: -Simultaneousoperation/stopofalltheunits. -Simultaneousemergencystopofalltheunits. -Operationsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits. -Alarmsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits.
- The central station can be used together with each unit's individual remote control.
Fig. 8 PSC-5S Installation Diagram
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
20 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
CSC-5S
Fig. 9 CSC-5S Remote Control
- 8 chiller and 8 CSC-5S central remote control addresses can be connected for each H-LINK.- Up to 8 central remote controls (CSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.- A standard external input terminal is included for possible connection to a timer.- Basic functions, heat/cold mode and temperature setting.- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the
error. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.- The external signals control the following functions:
-Start/Stop -Operationmode(Cooling/Heating) -Settemperature(Cold/Heat)
Fig. 10 CSC-5S Installation Diagram
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
21TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Features and benefits
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
PSC-5T
Fig. 11 PSC-5T Remote Control
- The PSC-5T is a programmable weekly timer that can be used together with other remote controls that do not have the a built in weekly timer option, so that when they are connected they are fully timer controlled.
- The 7 days of the week and the start/stop times can be scheduled up to � times a day with the PSC-5T timer.
- The remote control can be deactivated during the stoppage time (if it is used with the PSC-5S and PC-P1HE).
- It has two types of weekly schedules (A and B), which can easily be changed for winter and summer periods.
- All the settings are digitally displayed allowing the operation and settings to be checked easily.- The power failure safety function prevents the timer from stopping during a power cut (even if it lasts for
weeks).
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
22 TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Features and benefits
1.5. Computerised Central Remote Controls (BMS)
HARC-BX E
Fig. 12 HARC-BX E Remote Control
- The use of just one BMS allows you to fully control the different systems installed in intelligent buildings, such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, etc.
- This type of remote control can act as link gateway interface with systems that use the LonWorks protocol (installations with intelligent control or BMS).
- HARC-BX E allows the control of up to 5 setting points and the remote supervision of a maximum of � values. With the HARC-BX E connected to a H-LINK network, a maximum of 8 outdoor units can be used and up to �� indoor units controlled.
- A maximum of 8 HARC-BX E can be connected to the same H-Link.- The HARC-BX E central remote control can be connected to any point of the H-Link system.- Status self-check. HARC-BX provides the necessary information for the BMS control to easily check the
system's operation and any alarms when they occur.
HARC-70CE1
Fig. 13 HARC-70CE1 Remote Control
- The use of just one BMS allows you to fully control the different systems installed in intelligent buildings, such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, etc.
- This type of remote control can act as link gateway interface with systems that use the LonWorks protocol (installations with intelligent control or BMS).
- With the HARC-70CE1 connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and 7 monitoring points of up to � chillers.
- With the HARC-70CE1 OP connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and up to �� monitoring points of one chiller unit.
- The HARC-70CE1 (OP) remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status.
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
2�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Features and benefitsTechnical catalogue
Table of contents
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
25PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2. INDIVIDUALREMOTECONTROLS.......................................................27
2.1. PC-P2HTE..............................................................................................27
2.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................27
2.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................272.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................28
2.1.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................28
2.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................29
2.1.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................292.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................292.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................302.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................302.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................312.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................32
2.1.4. Operation................................................................................................32
2.1.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................332.1.4.2.Operationmodeselectionprocedure.................................................................34
2.1.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................40
2.1.5.1.PC-P2HTEcommandfunctions..........................................................................402.1.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................412.1.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................44
2.1.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................49
2.1.6.1.Abnormaltransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandindoorunit..................492.1.6.2.Troubleshootingprocedureforunitsconnectedtotheremotecontrol................492.1.6.3.Troubleshootingoncheckmode.........................................................................512.1.6.4.Checkingprocedureforeachmaincomponent..................................................592.1.6.5.Remotecontrolself-checkingprocedure............................................................62
2.1.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................64
2.1.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................642.1.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................64
Table of contents
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
2� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
General details
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
27PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2. INDIVIDUAL REMOTE CONTROLS
2.1. PC-P2HTE
2.1.1. General details
2.1.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features:
-ExcellentdisplaythankstoalargeLCDscreenandasimpleindicationandreadingfunctionforprogrammevariablesandpossiblealarms.
-Excellentair-conditioningcontrolthankstotheweeklytimeroption,allowingtheuserstoadjusttheA/Cunitsettingstooperateonaone-weekbasis.
-Built-inself-diagnosticfunction.Awarningsystemindicatesanymalfunctionorproblembytriggeringandalarmcodewithdetailedinformationaboutthealarm.
-Allindoorunitfunctionscanbeselectedandadjustedusingtheremotecontrol.
-Upto16indoorunitscanbecontrolledonthesameoperationmode.
-Thisremoteincorporatesathermistoronthebottomrighthandsidewhichallowstheuserbetteradjustthedesiredroomtemperature,thankstotheinstallationofasensorclosertotheair-conditionedarea.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that with two units installed, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.
Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:
Individual Remote Controls Remote receivers Wireless receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9 Receiver-FSNMPC-P5H PC-RLH8 Receiver-FSN1M
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
Thisremotecontrolis100%compatiblewiththefollowingindoorunits:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407CRCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7ERPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7ERPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7RRPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7ERPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPK-FSG2M* RPK-FSNM* RPFI-G7E
RCD-FSG(1/2) RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCI-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*RPF-FSG2Ei RPIM-FSNERPFI-FSG2Ei RCIM-FSNE
Tab. 2
* In these cases, the built in wireless receiver must be disconnected
General Details and General Dimensions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
28 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.1.2. Maintenance advantages
I. Alarm codes
There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit.The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.
II. Test run from the remote control
Auto-diagnostic: Quick diagnostics function for controller cards, cards in connected indoor units and cards in outdoor units (PCBs) using the LCD screen.
Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.
Optional function settings:• Various optional functions on the indoor units (IU) can be activated or deactivated using the remote control, for example:
-Calibrationphaseshiftof4SDgrCinheatingmode(seeTab.6,point).-Fanspeed.-Thermostat,etc.
• Several indoor units (IU) can be adjusted at the same time or their configuration can be changed after installation.
2.1.2. Dimension Details
15120
120
20
1234SSunSatFriThuWedTueSETSCHEDULENEXT
OFFONON
AUTOCONTROLOPER.LOCKNOFUNCTION RNHRADDS
%˚C
RCSTHMCHECKFILTER
TEMP.SET
LOWMEDHIGH
COOL
AUTO
HEATDRY
FAN
SERVICE
H.STRG
DEFROSTCENTRAL
T.RUNABNML
Mon
UNIT
A/C
VENTI
TEMPRUN/STOP
Fig. 1
Installation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
2�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.3. Installation
2.1.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.1.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 3
Installation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
Atleast50mm
Fig. 2
2.1.3.4. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4).- All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
RemotecontrolDAY SCHEDULE
SELECT
LOUVERVENTI
MODE FANSPEED TIMER RESET
OK
1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Cabletie 1 Forattachingthecabletotheringcore
Ringcore 1 Forsecuringthecables
Tab. 4
Installation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.3.5. Installation procedure
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section as indicated in Fig. 3.
Screwdriver
BracketGroove
Hendiduras
SoporteDestornilladorScrewdriver Bracket
Groove
Bracket
Indentpart
Fig. 3
2. Place the control unit in the housing, as indicated below (2 examples):
I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.
ATerminal BTerminal
- Secure the bracket to the wall using the 2 screws provided.
- Insert the cable through the hole in the control unit. A hole can be made in the top centre and top left hand side (at the top in the image).
- Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.
Fig. 4
II. If using an electric control box.
There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.)
- Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box
1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.
2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.
3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.
$ CAUTION
Make sure the cable is not loose and that the length is correct. If it is left loose, it may become pinched when the control unit is fitted to the bracket, possibly causing an operational fault.
Fig. 5
Installation and Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
�. Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.
Connectteminals
Fig. 6
5. Control unit assembly procedure-Insertthehooksonthecontrolunitintotheholesontopofthebracket.-Pushthebottompartoftheunittowardsthebracket.-Aclicksoundindicatesthatthecontrolunitissecuredtothebracketandtheassemblyprocedureiscomplete.
2.1.3.6. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
For operational and safety purposes, fit the ring core "attachment" when installing the unit.
- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in Fig. 7, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.
- If the cable measures 0.75mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.
- Secure the cable using the cable tie (accessory).
This diagram shows an example of a standard connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.
Fig. 7
2.1.4. Operation
NOTE
- If the LOW fan speed is selected and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.
- When the system is started after being out of use for more than 3 months, we recommend that the system is checked by the service provider.
- If the system is not going to be used for a long period of time, turn it off at the mains. Otherwise it will continue to consume electricity, since the oil heater remains on even when the compressor is off.
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.4.1. Description
Fanspeedindicator:Indicatesthefanspeedselected:HIGH,MEDorLOW
DAY SCHEDULE
SELECT
LOUVERVENTI
MODE FANSPEED TIMER RESET
OK
Fig. 8 Model: PC-P2HTE
Operationmodeindicator:Indicatestheoperationmodeselected:FAN,COOL,HEAT,DRYorAUTO
Runindicator(greenLED)
Ventilationindicator:Indicateswhetherthetotalheatexchangerhasbeenselected*.(*see2.1.4.1.III)A/C airconditioningonlyVENTI totalheatexchangeronlyA/C+VENTI ifbothareselected
RUN/STOPbutton
MODEbutton
FANSPEEDbutton
Panelupanddownoperationbutton
VENTIbutton(ventilatoroperation)
LOUVERbutton(oscillatinglouveroperation)
SELECT(DAY/SCHEDULE)buttons
ON/OFFTIMERbutton(starts/stopstimer).(Usedtoactivateordeactivatethetimerfunction)
OKbutton
RESETbutton(resetsfilter)Aftercleaningtheairfilter,presstheRESETbutton.TheFILTERmessagewilldisappearandthenextfiltercleaningtimewillbeset.Itcanalsobeusedtoexitthecheckmodeandtheoptionalfunctionconfigurationmode.
TEMPbuttons(temperaturesetting)
T.RUNindicator(testrunindicator)OKindicatorTheseindicationsaredisplayedduringTESTRUNandOKoperations.
ABNMLindicator(alarm)FILTERindicatorPanelup/downindicator
SETTEMPindicator(temperaturesetting)
1234Sindicator(schedulenumbersetting).Mon,Tue...Sunindicator(indicatestheweekday).
Indicatesthestart/stoptimeforeachoftheunits.Timeindicator(indicatesthescheduledtime)NOFUNCTIONindicator(indicateswhenakeyhasnofunction)OPERLOCKindicator(keyslocked)ADDSindicator(indoorunits)RNHR:RNindicator(refrigerantcyclenumber)andHR(hoursofservice)
SERVICEindicator(servicemode:indicatesaswitchtospecialfunctions)CENTRALindicatorDEFROSTindicator
Timeindicator.
Louverindicator.
Tab. 5
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.4.2. Operation mode selection procedure
I. Procedure for operation in cooling, heating, dehumidifying and ventilation modes
• Switch on the power.TwoverticallinesaredisplayedontheLCDdisplaytogetherwiththeA/CorVENTIindications.
• Press the MODE button.Bypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillchangefromCOOLtoHEAT,DRYandFANmodes(orfromCOOLtoDRYandFANincoolingonlymodels).(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhenCOOLmodeisselected).
• Press the RUN/STOP button.Therunindicatorwilllightup(green).Thesystemwillstartupautomatically.
NOTE
Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction: Once this setting is made it is stored in the memory and therefore does not need to be set again every day. To change this setting, refer to the "II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction" section.
• Turn off (STOP)PresstheRUN/STOPbuttonagain.Therunindicator(green)willgooff.Thesystemwillstopautomatically.
NOTE
The fan may run for a further two minutes or so after stopping the system in heating mode.
II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction.
NOTE
- If the OK button is pressed for more than three seconds in operation mode, the unit will switch to check mode (CHECK).- In check mode (CHECK), by pressing the OK button once the user can view the different variables using the TEMP or buttons.- To return to operation mode, press and hold OK for more than three seconds and then press OK 2 twice.
• Setting the temperatureSetthetemperaturebypressingtheTEMPorbuttons.Thetemperatureincreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(max.30°C).Thetemperaturedecreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(min.19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode) (Thefigureshowsthetemperaturesetto28°C).
• Setting the fan speedPresstheFANSPEEDbutton.BypressingtheFANSPEEDbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillswitchfromHIGHtoMEDandLOW.TheunitisdesignedandsizedforoptimumoperationwiththefansettoHIGH.(ThefigureshowstheMEDspeedsetting.)
NOTE
In DRY mode, the fan speed changes automatically to LOW and cannot be changed (although the indicator will still show the current setting).
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�5PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
• Setting the louver direction1. PressingtheLOUVERbuttonstartsthelouver.Thelouveroscillatesatapproximately70°fromthehorizontaltovertical
position.Whenthe“ “symbolmoves,thisindicatesthatthelouverisoscillating.
2. Whenthelouveroscillationfunctionisnotrequired,presstheSWINGLOUVERbuttonagain.Theoscillatorwillstop(althoughnotimmediately,asindicatedinpoint3)attheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ “symbol.
3. Bycommandingthelouvertomovetoaspecificposition,itwillmovefromtheinitialpositiontoverticalandwillthenriseagaintothehorizontalposition,beforefinallymovingtothepositionindicatedbytheuser.
• Fixed positionForcoolingmodes,theairoutletanglecanbesettooneof5differentpositions.Inheatingmode,itcanbesettooneof7positions.
• Automatic oscillation positionThelouverpositionindicatorswillmovecontinuouslyaccordingtotheoscillationofthelouver.
NOTE
- In heating mode, the louver angle changes automatically.- There is a phase shift between the actual angle of the louver and that indicated on the LCD screen. When the SWING LOUVER button
is pressed, the louver does not stop immediately. It will move an oscillate again before stopping. - To find out the exact louver angles, check the corresponding catalogue for the unit installed.
III. Ventilation mode procedure
NOTE
This function is only available when the total heat exchanger is connected*. When carrying out the following procedures without the total heat exchanger connected, the NO FUNCTION indication will flash for 5 seconds.*Total heat exchanger: When adjusting the temperature, the indoor unit will release air from inside the room and replace it with air from outside. To adjust the air from outside to the temperature setting inside the room, it is passed through the total heat exchanger. The air pre-treated (pre-conditioned) in this heat exchanger is routed to the indoor unit where it is conditioned and then circulated into the room.
• VentilationPressVENTIbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorchangesfromA/CtoVENTIandA/C+VENTI.(ThefigureshowstheA/C+VENTIsetting).
NOTE
- If the system mode is changed to VENTI during individual air conditioning system operation, the system will switch off.
- If the system mode is changed A/C during individual operation of the total heat exchanger, it will switch off.
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
IV. Automatic COOL/HEAT mode procedure
AutomaticCOOL/HEATmodemustbeconfiguredasanoptionalfunction.ThisfunctionallowsthesystemtobeswitchedautomaticallytoCOOL/HEATmodebasedonthedifferencebetweenthetemperaturesettingandandthetemperatureofthesuctionair.Iftheintakeairexceedsthetemperaturesettingby3°C,thesystemwillswitchtoCOOLmodeand,ifitis3°Clessthanthetemperaturesetting,thesystemwillswitchtoHEATmode.
NOTE
- If the heating function is set to LOW, the overload protection devices will often shut-off the system. When this happens, set the fan speed to HIGH or MED (medium).
-If the outdoor temperature is above 21°C, the system will not operate in heating mode.
V. Timer function procedure
• Setting the current date and time
1.PresstheSELECTDAY ▼ buttonforatleast3secondstochangefromoperationmodetothecurrentdaysettingmode.SETwillbedisplayedandthedaywillflash.Allofthedaysoftheweekaredisplayed.
:SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
2.PresstheSELECTDAY ▼ buttonuntilthecurrentdayisflashingandpressOK.Allthedayswilldisappearexcepttheselectedday,andthetimewillstarttoflash. :
SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
3.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ tomovethe"hour"upanddown;onceset,pressOK.The"hour"willstopandthe"minutes"willstarttoflash. :
SET Wed
4.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ againtosetthe"minutes"and,onceset,pressOKagain.Thecurrenttimesettingmodewillendandthesystemwillreturntooperationmode.The"minutes"willbedisplayedandSETwillturnoff.The"seconds"willstarttocountfromzero.
:Wed
• Setting the timer schedules
1.PresstheTIMERbutton.SETwillbedisplayedandthefirstschedulenumber"1"willflash.Therestoftheschedulenumberswillremainfixed.
NOTE
Pressing and holding the TIMER button for more than 3 seconds activates the weekday timer schedule setting. (See point VI).
:SET 1234S
SCHEDULEON OFF:
2.BypressingtheSELECTSCHEDULE ▲ button,theschedulenumberwillchangeinsequence:[1][2][3][4][S][1]….,-Byselecting[S],theusercansettheon/offtimeandthetemperaturechangeasameansof
savingenergy(checkthesectiononsettingthetemperaturechange).-BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitches
tooperationmode.
:SET 1234S
ADDS
SCHEDULE
RNkHR
ON OFF:
3.PressingtheOKbuttonindicatestheselectedschedulenumber.Theotherschedulenumberswillswitchoffandtheswitch-on"hour"fortheselectedprogramwillflash. :
SET 1SCHEDULEON
OFF:
4.PressSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ toadjustthe"hour"and,onceset,pressOK.The"hour"willstopandthe"minutes"willstarttoflash. :
SET 1SCHEDULEON
OFF:
5.PresstheSELECTDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ buttontoadjustthe"minutes"and,onceset,pressOK.The"minutes"willremainfixedandtheswitch-off"hour"willflash. :
SET 1SCHEDULEON
OFF:
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�7PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
6.Settheswitch-offtimebyfollowingthesameprocedureastheswitch-ontime.Theschedulewillbestoredinthememoryandalltheavailableschedulewillreappear(1,2,3,4,S).
NOTE
Repeat from step 2 onwards to adjust the other schedule settings.
:SET 1
SCHEDULEON OFF:
7.BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitchestooperationmode. :
SNEXT SCHEDULE
OFF:Mon
VI. Assigning timer schedules to the days of the week.
1.PresstheTIMERbuttonformorethan3secondsandSETwillappear.Allthedaysoftheweekwillbedisplayedalongwiththeschedulenumbers(asexplainedinthepreviouspoint). :
SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234SON OFF:
2.PresstheDAY▼buttonuntilthedesireddayappears.Whenpressed,thedaysoftheweekwillflash:[Mon][Tue]…[Sun][Mon~Sun][Mon~Fri][Sat,Sun][Mon]…Ifseveraldaysflash,thesamesettingwillapplytoallofthesedays.
3.PresstheSCHEDULE ▲ buttonuntilthedesiredschedulenumberflashes.:
SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234SON OFF:
4.PressOK;theschedulenumberselectedinstep3appliestothedayssetinstep2.PressingOKwilleitheractivateordeactivatetheschedule.Ifitisactivated,thewordSCHEDULEwillbedisplayedabovetheswitch-offtime.
:SET Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1234S
SCHEDULEON OFF:
5.PresstheTIMERbutton;thesystemwillexittheprogrammingmode(SETwillswitchoff)andreturntooperationmode. :
MonNEXT SCHEDULE
OFF:
VII. Cancelling the timer
Inoperationmode,pressandholdDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.NEXTSCHEDULEwillflash.(Theentiretimersettingiscancelled) :
Mon 1234SNEXT SCHEDULE
ON:
Intimercancellationmode,pressandholdDAY/SCHEDULE ▲ ▼ simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.NEXTSCHEDULEwillappear.(Timeractivation) :
Mon 1234SNEXT SCHEDULE
ON:
VIII. Setting the temperature change (energy-saving mode).
1.Followtheswitch-on/switch-offsettingprocedureinsteps1and2ofthe"Settingthetimerschedules"sectionandselectprogram"S". :
1234SSCHEDULEON
OFF:SET
2.Followtheswitch-on/switch-offsettingprocedureinsteps4,5and6inthe"Settingthetimerschedules"sectionandsettheswitch-on/switch-offtime.Thiswillbringupthesettingtemperature.
:1234S
SCHEDULEON OFF:
SET
3.SelectthetemperaturechangeusingtheTEMPbuttons.Atthispoint,iftheRESETbuttonispressed,thetemperaturechangewillnotbesetand“--”willbedisplayed. :
1234SSCHEDULEON
OFF
SET
:
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�8 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
4.BypressingtheTIMERbutton,SETandSCHEDULEareturnedoffandthesystemswitchestooperationmode. :
SNEXT SCHEDULE
OFF:Mon
NOTE
1. Carrying out this operation will change the temperature setting indicator.2. The increase or decrease of the set temperature during the scheduled time (±3 °C or ±5 °C) will vary depending on the operation
mode. - If operating in "ventilation", "cooling" or "dehumidifying" mode, the temperature variation is + . - If operating in "heating" mode, the temperature variation is - .
IX. Automatic heating operation (freeze protection)
• ActivationInoperationmode,presstheMODEbuttonforatleast3seconds.AutomaticheatingoperationisactivatedandONwillappeartotherightofthecurrenttime.ONwillflashcontinuouslyduringautomaticheatingoperation.
:Mon
NEXT SCHEDULEON
OFF:
• CancellationDuringautomaticheatingoperation,presstheMODEbuttonforatleast3secondstochangetotheoperationmode.TheautomaticheatingoperationisswitchedoffandtheONindicationtotherightofthecurrenttimewilldisappear.
:Mon
NEXT SCHEDULE
OFF:
NOTE
If the room temperature drops below a certain level*, the heating will switch on automatically. In this case, when the room reaches the temperature setting, the system will switch off.
* The user may select (5/10/15 °C) through an optional setting (see Tab. 6, option FE).
X. Operating lock procedure
Toavoidanyincorrectuseofthebuttons,theycanbelocked(seebelow).• ActivationInoperationmode,presstheSELECT ▲ ▼ buttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3seconds.TheoperationlockwillbeactivatedandOPER.LOCKwillbedisplayedIfabuttonispressedduringthistime,OPER.LOCKwillflash.
:Mon
NEXT SCHEDULE
OFF
OPER.LOCK
:
• CancellationWhilesystemoperationislocked,presstheSELECT ▲ ▼ buttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3secondstoreturntooperationmode.TheoperationlockwillbecancelledandOPER.LOCKgoesoff.
:Mon
NEXT SCHEDULE
OFF:
NOTE
- The button to be locked can be selected in "change operation mode", "temperature setting", "air flow" and "automatic louver" through an optional setting (F8~Fb) indicated in Tab. 6.
- This setting can be changed from a second remote control.
Operation
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
XI. Indications in normal conditions
• Thermostat StoppageWhenthethermostatoftheunitisoff,thefanspeedchangestoLOWandtheindicatorwillnotchange.(Heatingmodeonly.)
• DefrostWhenthesystemisrunningindefrostmode,theDEFROSTindicationwillappear.Thefanoftheindoorunitwillslowdownorstop(asselected).Thelouverwillstopinthehorizontalpositionat35°.However,theindicatorontheLCDscreenwillremainon.(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhensettoDEFROST.)
Whentheunitstopsduringdefrostmode,therunindicator(green)willswitchoff.However,thesystemwillcontinuetodisplayDEFROSTandtheunitwillstart-uponcethedefrostmodeiscomplete.
• FilterCloggedfilter:TheFILTERindicationwillappearwhenthetimeprogrammedinfunctionb4(seeTab.6andTab.7)expires,indicatingthatitneedstobecleaned.Cleanthefilter:PresstheRESETbuttonaftercleaning.TheFILTERsignwillturnoff.
XII. Indications in abnormal conditions
• Abnormal conditionTherunindicator(green)willflash.TheALARMindicatorwillbedisplayedontheLCDscreen.Thescreenwillalsoindicatethenumberoftheindoorunit,thealarmcodeandthemodelcode.Ifseveralindoorunitsareconnected,theseindicationswillbedisplayedforeachone,oneatatime.NotedowntheindicationsandcontactyourHITACHIserviceprovider.
• Power failureAllon-screenindicationswilldisappear.Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailure,itwillnotrestartautomatically,evenwhenthepowerisrestored.Intheeventofapowerfailurelastingnomorethan2seconds,theunitwillrestartautomatically.
• Electrical noiseTheremaybecaseswhenallofthedisplayindicationsareoffandtheunitisstopped.Thisisbecausethemicrocomputerhasswitchedontoprotecttheunitfromelectricalnoise.
NOTE
- In cases where a wireless remote control is being used for the indoor wall type unit, remove the connectors (CN25) connected to the indoor PCB. Otherwise, the unit will not work.
- Stored data cannot be deleted unless the remote control is reset.
Indoorunitnumber
Alarmcode
CodeModel
Numberofconnectedindoorunits
Alarmcode
Alternateindicationeverysecond
Model number
Indication Model
H Heatpump
P Inverter
F Multiple
C Coolingonly
E Other
IVX,individual
operation
L KPI
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.5. Optional functions
2.1.5.1. PC-P2HTE command functions
Theremotecontrolchangestheoptionalsettingmodewiththefollowingprocedures.Theoptionalfunctionsareprogrammedusingtheremotecontrol.
• Programming and setting modeCheckthattheunitisoff,pressandholdtheremotecontrolbuttons"OK"and"RESET"simultaneouslyforatleast3secondsandthecontrolwillchangetothefieldsettingmode.Oncethemodeischanged,theunitwilldisplaythe"SERVICE"indication,withthenumber“0”flashbelowit.
• Optional setting mode. Selecting SERVICE Inprogrammingandsettingmode(mentionedabove),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”andthenumberflashingbeneaththe“SERVICE”indicationwillchange(0<=>02).Settheflashingnumberto“0”,press"OK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.
• Selecting the indoor unita.Inoptionalsettingmode,selectingSERVICE0willchangetheindicatoronthe
remotecontroldisplay,asshowninthefollowingdiagram. Indication"0”willbeactivated. Theaddressoftheindoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetis
indicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"ADDS"appearingbelow.
Therefrigerantcyclenumberoftheoutdoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetisindicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"RN"appearingbelow.
Thesettingtemperatureindicationisdeactivated.
b.Atthepointmentionedabove(a),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”ontheremotecontrolinordertochangetheindoorunitonwhichyouwishtosettheoptionalfunction.
NOTE
- The indoor unit can be selected from among those connected to the remote control.- If the indication for both the address and the refrigerant cycle is "AA", the settings for
all indoor units are the same.
c.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press"OK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.
:
• Changing optional functions and setting conditionsa.Inoptionalsettingmode,theindicationonthecontroldisplaywillchange,asshown
below.
Theindications"ADDS"and"RN"willbedeactivated. Thesettingconditionoftheoptionalfunctionisindicatedinthetimersetting
hourindicationsections. Theoptionalfunctionnumberisindicatedinthesettingtemperatureindication
section.
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
b. Press either “SELECT ▲” or “SELECT ▼” and the optional function indication will change, as shown below.
Whenpressing“SELECT▲”
2 2 ... e f2
Whenpressing“SELECT▲”
c. Press "OK" and the setting condition of the optional function will change, as shown below.
00 0 ... 08
• Selecting a different indoor unitIfyoupress“TEMP”or“TEMP”whenintheoptionalsettingmode,theconditionoftheremotecontrolchangesothattheindoorunitmaybeselectedtosettheoptionalfunction,asdescribedabove.
• Returning from optional function setting mode to operation modePressthe"RESET"buttontostoretheoptionalfunctionsettingandreturntooperationmode.
2.1.5.2. Optional functions list
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingtheinternalcontrolfunctionsofthe
IU.
Resettingheatingtemperaturecalibration.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoresetadifferenceof4°C.
0 Available
2 Maintainingventilationspeedduringthermostatstoppageinheatingmode.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.
0 Available
C Drainpumpactivatedinheatingmode.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoactivatethedrainpumpinheatingmode.
0 Available
C Selectingstaticpressure. 00 Averagestaticpressure(factorysetting)
ThisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelsinRPIunitsusingtheremotecontrol.0 Highstaticpressure
02 Lowstaticpressure
Increasefanspeed(RCD)(RCI).
00 Normal Thisfunctionisusedtochangethefanspeedforroomswithhighceilings.
0 Speedincrease1
02 Speedincrease2
C Maintainingthefanspeedincreaseduringathermostatstoppageinheatingmode(RCD)(RCI).
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC5.
0 Available
C8 Remotecontrolthermistor. 00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol
Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
0 Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor
02 Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor
C Selectionoflogicofthecontactusedforexternalcontrols.
00 Normallyopencontact Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicoftheforcedshutdown.
0 Normallyclosedcontact
Tab. 6 Optional functions list (continued on next page)
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from previous page)
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingthecontrolfunctions
oftheOU
3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoprotectthecompressorwhenitisfrequentlystartedandstopped.
0 Available
C Cancellationofthe3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".
0 Available
Remotecontrolinternalcontrol
functions
Changingfiltercleaningtimes
00 Standard Thisfunctionallowsyoutochangethetimeindicatedbytheremotecontrolforchangingtheairfilteroftheindoorunit.
0 100hours
02 1200hours
0 2500hours
0 Noindication
Lockingoperationmode 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangetheoperationmode.
0 Available
Lockingthetemperaturesetting
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethesettingtemperature.
0 Available
Lockingunittocooling-onlymode
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesoffheatingmode.
0 Available
8 Automaticcooling/heatingoperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesautomaticallyfromcoolingtoheating.
0 Available
Lockingairflow 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethefanspeed.
0 Available
F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols
00 Primary Thisfunctionisusedwhentworemotecontrolsareinstalledforonesystem
0 Secondary
F8 Modelock00 Unlocked
Thisfunctionisusedtolockthe"indicatedsettingpoints"ontheremotecontrolwhenapplyingthe"OperatingLockProcedure"describedinpoint2.1.4.1.X
0 Locked
F Temperaturelock00 Unlocked
0 Locked
FA Fanlock00 Unlocked
0 Locked
F Swinglouverlock00 Unlocked
0 Locked
FCSettingtheminimumtemperatureincoolingmode
0
a0 +1~+10
InColdmode,thetemperaturerangeissetas:
- Max. = �0 °C- Min.: from 1� to 27
FdSettingthemaximumtemperatureinheatingmode
0
a0 -1~-10
InHeatmode,thetemperaturerangeissetas:
- Max. = from 20 to �0- Min. = 17
FETemperatureduringautomaticheatingoperation
00 Setto5°C
Freezeprotection0 Setto10°C
02 Setto15°C
Tab. 6 Optional functions list, continued (continued on next page)
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingremotecontroladditional
systems.
d Switchinguniton/offaftermainspowerfailure/restoration.
00 Notavailable. Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.
0 Available
d Savingtheunitstatusafteranelectricalpowerfailure.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.
0 Available
Settingadditionalsystemcontrol
functions.
E Coolingmodeusingoutdooraironly.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).
0,02 Available
(KPI)Ventilationmode. 00 Automaticventilation Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.
0 Ventilationthroughtotalheatexchanger.
02 Ventilationbypass(withouttotalheatexchanger)
E2 (Econofresh)Outdoorhumiditysensor.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheusertocontroltheoutdoorairintakebasedonthehumiditysensorconnected.0 Available
(KPI)Increasedairsupply. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoensurethattheairpressureintheroomisgreaterthanthepressureintheadjoiningrooms.
0 Available
E (Econofresh)Gassensor. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoforcetherecyclingofairintheroomwhenthegassensor(CO2)isactivated.0,02 Available
(KPI)Previouscooling/heatingperiods.
00 Standard Thisfunctiondelaysthestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.
0 30minutes
02 60minutes
Tab. 6 Optional functions list
ElementsC,C2,C,C,CA,CC,d2,E,E,F,F,F,F,Fhavenofunctionassigned.
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.5.3. Remote control optional functions
. Resetting heating temperature calibration.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheremotecontrolsettingorset-pointtemperatureandtheindoorunitsuctionairtemperatureneedtobethesame.Instandardheatingmode,thesuctionairtemperatureisgreaterthanthatoftheroom,thereforethesettingtemperatureusediscalibratedtotheindicatedtemperature+4°C.SettingTemperatureUsed=IndicatedSettingTemperature+4°C(b1=0)/+0°C(b1=1)Thisfunctionisusefulwhenthethermistorisremovedfromtheindoorunitsuctionareaandisinstalledinadifferentlocation.
Thefollowingtableshowstheindicatedsettingtemperatureandthesuctionairtemperatureafterresettingtheheatingtemperaturecalibration.
2 . Maintaining ventilation speed in the event of a thermostat stoppage in heating mode.Ifthefanspeedchangesto"LOW"whenthethermostatoftheunitisstopped,theairintheroommaybecomestratifiedduetohotairaccumulatingontheceiling.Inthiscase,werecommendtheuseofthecirculationpumpfunctionexplainedbelow.
Thisfunctionmaintainstheventilationspeedwhenaunitrunninginheatingmodehasathermostaticfault.Thiskeepsthemovementoftheairintheroomatthesamelevelaswhenthethermostatisrunning,ensuringauniformairdistribution.Iftheindoorunitisfittedwithanautomaticswinglouver,thiswillalsobekeptrunningwhentheheatingthermostatisdeactivated.
. 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.Whenacompressorisfrequentlystartedandstoppedovershortintervals,itmustbeprotectedbyusingthisfunction.Activatingthisfunctionaddstheminimumthree-minuteoperationmode(astopmodeofaminimumthreeminutesisstandard).IfusingSET-FREE,thisfunctionisconfiguredbydefault.
NOTE
When the safety device is activated or the "ON/OFF" button is pressed, the compressor will stop immediately.
. Changing filter cleaning times.Thefrequencyoftheindicationtocleanthefilterispre-setatthefactory.
However,cleaningtimescanbechangeddependingontheconditionofthefilter,asshowninthefollowingtable:
Filter indication periodApprox. 100
hoursApprox. 1200
hoursApprox. 2500
hoursNo indication
Forbuilt-in4-waytype Periodchanged Periodchanged Factorysetting Periodchanged
Remotecontrolliquidcrystaldisplay 0 02
0 or00 (*)
0
Tab. 7
(*)FortheRPKmodel,thefactorysettingis200hours
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�5PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
. Locking the operation mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheoperationmodedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactivated,theselectedoperationmodecannotbechanged.
. Locking the setting temperature.Thisfunctionisusedwhenthesettingtemperaturedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactive,theselectedsettingtemperaturecannotbechanged.
. Locking the unit to cooling-only mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheunitisrequiredtooperateincoolingmodeonly.ThisfunctioncancelsoutheatingmodeandAUTOautomaticoperationontheunit,leavingitexclusivelyforcoolingoperation.
8 . Automatic cooling/heating operation.Thisfunctionisusedtooperatetheunitsothatitswitchesautomaticallybetweencoolingandheatingmodes.Thisfunctiondoesnotworkwhentheoutdoorunitisacooling-onlymodelorwhen"lockingunittocooling-onlymode”isselected.
. Locking the fan speed.Thisfunctionisusedtolockthefanspeed.Whenactivated,thefanspeedcannotbechangedusingtheremotecontrol.
C . Drain pump activated in heating mode.Thisfunctionisusedtostartthedrainpumpinheatingmode.However,forSET-FREEsystems,theindoorunitsarenotfittedwithhumidifiers.Donotchangethe“00”settingconditionofthe“C”element.
C . High Speed / Static Pressure.ForRCI/RCDunits,thisfunctionisusedtoincreasefanspeedforindoorunitsinstalledinroomswithhighceilings.Therearetwosettings;0speedincrease1and02speedincrease2.ForRPIunits,thisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelswiththeremotecontrol.
C . Maintaining the increased fan speed during a thermostat stoppage in heating mode (RCD)(RCI)Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitoperatinginheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC.
C . Cancellation of the 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.ForSET-FREEsystems,theaforementioned"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation"describedinfunction()isthestandarddefaultfunction.Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
C8 . Remote control thermistor.Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitusingtheremotecontrolthermistorinsteadofthesuctionairthermistor,althoughthetwocanbeusedtogether.Setto“0”or“02”whenusedEvenwhenthefunctionissetto“0”or“02”,ifthetemperaturedetectedisincorrectdue,forexample,toafaultintheremotecontrolthermistor,thesuctionairthermistorintheindoorunitsareautomaticallyusedbydefault.
Thesettingconditionandventilationmodeareshownbelow:
Setting condition
Ventilation mode Description
00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol.
Differentfunctionsforcontrollingtheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
01Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
02Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor.
Tab. 8
C . Selecting the logic of the contact for external controls.Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicofthecontactfortheforcedshutdowninputsignal.
Thesettingconditionandcontactlogicareshownbelow.
Setting conditionContact
logicSequence
Activation"Open" contact
"Closed" contact
00 ContactA NormalForced
shutdown
01 ContactBForced
shutdownNormal
Tab. 9
d . Switching unit on/off after mains power failure.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.
NOTE
The unit switches on and off in accordance with the power on/off setting in the event of a power failure. If the failure occurs during a stoppage activated by the remote control, the unit will restart automatically once the power source is restored.
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�7PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
d . Power source on/off.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.Thisfunctionisusedtorestarttheunitautomaticallywhenthepowersourceisrestoredafterapowerfailureofmorethan2seconds.Thecompressorunitwillrestartamaximumof3minutesafterthefailure,inadditiontothe2secondsofdowntime.
NOTE
In the event of a power failure when the unit is stopped, it will switch off after the power supply is restored.
E . Ventilation mode (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.
Thesettingconditionandventilationmodeareshownbelow:
Setting condition
Ventilation mode Description
00 AutomaticventilationSelectionofanefficientventilationmode(ventilationwithtotalheatexchangerorventilationbypass)tosaveenergybydetectingtheindoor/outdoortemperaturedifference.
01Totalheatexchanger
ventilation.Theheatexchangeiscontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.
02 VentilationbypassTheheatexchangeisnotcontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.
Tab. 10
E . Cooling mode using outdoor air onlyThisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition
Outdoor cooling mode Description
00 Notavailable Theoutdoorgrilleistotallyclosed.
01 Available Theoutdoorgrilleisfullyopen.
02 Available Theoutdoorgrilleisfullyopen.
Tab. 11
E2 . Increased air supply (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheairsupplyvolumebyincreasingthespeedofthesuctionairfaninrelationtotheoutputairmotor;thisincreasesthepressureintheroomwithagreaterairvolumethantheadjoiningrooms,avoidingtheintakeofcontaminatedairorbadsmells.
Theremotecontrolairflowsettingandtheactualairflowofthetotalheatexchangerwhenthisfunctionisactivatedarelistedbelow.
Remote control air flow setting Total heat exchanger air flowLOW MEDIUM
MEDIUM HIGH
HIGH HIGH
Tab. 12
Optional functions
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�8 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
E2 . Outdoor humidity sensor (Econofresh).Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinletbycontrollingtheairhumidity,openingorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition Humidity sensor Description00 Notavailable Thehumiditysensorisnotavailable.
01 Available Thehumiditysensorisavailable.
Tab. 13
NOTE
If a "HIGH" air flow is set using the remote control, the total heat exchanger air flow will also be "HIGH”, even when the user needs to adjust this function.
E . Previous cooling/heating periods (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtodelaythestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.
Thesettingconditionandthedelayperiodareshownbelow.
Setting condition Start-up delay period00 0minutes
01 30minutes
02 60minutes
Tab. 14
E .Gas sensor (Econofresh)Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinlet,controllingthelackofoxygenandanyexcessiveCO2build-upbyopeningorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition Gas sensor Condition00 Notavailable Thegassensorinletisnotavailable.
01 Available Thegassensorinletisavailable.
02 Available Thegassensorinletisavailable.
Tab. 15
f2 . Setting remote control as Primary or SecondaryThisfunctionisusedtosettworemotecontrolsconnectedtooneindoorunit:oneasPrimaryandtheotherasSecondary
Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Theremotecontrolissetasprimary.
02 Available Theremotecontrolissetassecondary.
Tab. 16
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.6. Maintenance and repair
2.1.6.1. Abnormal transmission between the remote control and indoor unit
Inthiscase,theLEDrunindicatorlocatedatthebottomleftofthescreenwillflashevery2seconds.
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Before analysing these problems, the system must be switched off at the mains.
Problem Cause Check point Action
Disconnectionorinadequatecontactoftheremotecontrolcable.
Cablingproblem Checkthecableandtheconnections. Repairorconnectthecable.
Remotecontrolfault. DifferentcausesCheckremotecontrolusing
theself-checkmode*1.Replacetheremotecontrol,iffaulty.
PCBfault(ontheindoorunitandremotecontrol).
WiredisconnectedfromPCB
Checkconnectors. Connectwirescorrectly.
PCBfault CheckPCBusingtheself-checkmode*2. ChangethePCB,iffaulty.
Tab. 17
*1: See section 2.1.6.4. II*2: See section 2.1.6.4. I
2.1.6.2. Troubleshooting procedure for units connected to the remote control
Possible causes:
- The remote control cable is broken.- Remote control cable contact failure.- Remote control plate failure.- If the LED run indicator flashes 5 times for 5 seconds, the display will show the unit number and alarm code
(see Fig. � and Fig. 10).-Notedownthecode(seeTab.18)andrequestassistancefromyourdistributor.
Unitnumber Alarmcode Modelcode
Refrigerantcyclenumber Numberofunitsconnected
Fig. 9
Model number
Indication Model
H Heatpump
P Inverter
F Multiple
C Coolingonly
E Other
IVX,individual
operation
L KPI
Tab. 18
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
50 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Table of alarm codes
Code No.
Category Abnormal condition Main cause
01 Indoor unit Protection device activation. Drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation. PSH activation.
0� Transmission Abnormal transmission between the indoor and the outdoor unit.
Incorrect wiring. PCB fault. Fuse disconnected. Power supply switched off.
0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB. Fan controller transmission fault.
0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller. Fan controller transmission fault.
05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring. Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.
0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit.
Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or insufficient power supply wiring capacity.
07Cycle
Reduced discharge gas superheating. Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.
08 Increased discharge gas temperature. Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.
0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation. Fan motor fault.11
Indoor unit sensor
Inlet air thermistor.
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor.1� Freeze-protection thermistor.1� Gas piping thermistor.15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh).1� Activation of the fan motor protection device. Fan motor fault.21
Outdoor unit sensor
High pressure sensor.
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.
22 Outdoor air thermistor.2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor.2� Evaporating thermistor.
2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor .
2� Low pressure sensor.
�0
System
System with an incorrect connection. There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.
�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting. Incorrect capacity code setting.
�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit.
Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.
�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting. The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.
�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.
�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit. Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.
�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor. Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.
��
Pressure
Pressure rate decrease protection activation. Fault with the compressor, inverter
�� Low pressure increase protection activation.Overload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.
�5 High pressure increase protection activation. Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�� High pressure decrease protection activation. Insufficient refrigerant�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation. Insufficient refrigerant51
Inverter
Abnormal inverter current sensor. Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation. Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage
5� IPM protection activation. Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)
5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins. Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�
Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection. Abnormal transmission detection circuit
57 Fan controller protection activation. Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller. Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin��
KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor. Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor.
EE Inverter Compressor protection. �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage
Tab. 19
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
51PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.6.3. Troubleshooting on check mode
UsetheOKbuttonontheremotecontrolinthefollowingcases:1. WhentheLEDrunindicatorisflashing.2. Tomonitorthecauseoftheproblemafterasystemrestartduetoastoppagewith
RUNindicatorflashing.3. Toperformchecksduringnormaloperationorstoppage.4. Tomonitortheinletairanddischargeairtemperatures.
DAY SCHEDULE
SELECT
LOUVERVENTI
MODE FANSPEED TIMER RESET
OK
Fig. 10
Check modesCheckmode1: Indicatingthecurrentdata.Checkmode2: Indicatingthedatasavedimmediatelybeforethefault.
Step No. Check modes
Normalmode1 Pressthebuttonforatleast3seconds
-Theindicationwillbedelayedsincethetransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandtheindoorunittakesaround10seconds.
-Alldatamaybedisplayedas“FF”,“-1”or“255”.Thesetemporaryvaluesgeneratedbythesoftwaredonotaffectthefunctionsofthedeviceatall.
(Thealarmcodemayalsobedisplayedas“FF”).
2Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed :
Alarmcodeidentifyingthelastfaultthatoccurredontheindicatedunit.Numberoftheconnectedunitoroftheunitforwhichthecheckmodewaspreviouslyset.
ADDS:Numberoftheindoorunitofcycleno.**RN:No.**Refrigerantcycleno.**
3 Forthenext7seconds. 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
52 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Checkmode14 After7seconds
Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.
Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
5 PressandholdthebuttonOK
5 foratleast3secondstoentercheckmode2
Ifwecontinueincheckmode1,steps6and7arearepetitionofsteps2and3.Seenoteinpoint8.
6Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed :
Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
7After7seconds 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.
Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13
8
Notefrompoint5.
NOTE
From check mode 1, the user may only enter check mode 2 - the check mode cannot be switched off
Checkmode29 Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.
Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
-Incheckmode2,theusercanaccessdatafromthefirstthreeunitsconnectedinsequencetoaremotecontrol.
10Checkmodeswitchedoff Pressandholdthebutton
OK
5 foratleast3seconds.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
5�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
I. Content of check mode 1
Bypressing“}”consecutively,thefollowingindicationswillbedisplayed.
Indicationoftemperature,etc.
Categorycodeindication
Step No. Temperature indication
1 Indoorunittemperaturesetting(°C). 22
2 Indoorunitairinlettemperature(°C). 2 20
3 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperature(°C).
4 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(°C). 20
5
Remotesensortemperature(°C).-Thisisonlydisplayedwhenconnectedtoaremotesensor.
Thedisplaynormallyshows“--”.TheRPKseriescannotconnecttoaremotesensor.Theindicationistherefore“--”.
2
6 Outdoorunitambienttemperature(°C). 0
7 Indoorunitheatexchangerrefrigerantgaspipingtemperature(°C). 2
8 Outdoorunitevaporatingtemperatureduringheating(°C). 8 02
9Controlinformation.-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.
FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning. --
10
Dischargegasrefrigeranttemperatureintopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis
given.-Ifthetemperatureexceeds126°C,theindicationwillread“126”.
A
11 Remotecontrolthermostattemperature. 2
NOTE
• Possible abnormal conditions
TEMPERATURE INDICATION FAULT
--Open circuit on any thermistor except 2
Check that the PCB is not reading the thermistor incorrectly. Consult the "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control" section
2Open circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
FF or2
Short-circuit in any thermistor except 2
2Short-circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
During transitory periods, such as on start-up, the "--" or "00" indicator may appear for a limited time.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
5� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Microcomputer input/output indication
12 Indoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C Z
Heat Thermostat on
Cold Thermostat on
Alarm
Operation
YH2
Y52H
Dark
13 Outdoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C2 -
Y211
Y212
Y52C1Y52C2
Y20B
Y20A
DarkFan operating
PCBrelay PartnameYH2 Relayfordrainpump(MD)and/ordewheater(EHW).Y52H Relayforelectricheater(CEH).Y211
4-wayvalverelay.Y212
Y52C1Compressorrelay.
Y52C2Y20A
Solenoidvalverelay.Y20B
Tab. 20
Symbols with the letter Y are relays on the indoor/outdoor unit PCB plate.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
55PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Unit stoppage cause indication
14 Causeofthestoppage. d 0
Codes:
00 Operationstopped,powerswitchedoff.
0 Thermostatswitchedoff(seebottomsectionpoint1).
02 Alarm(seebottomnotesectionpoint2).
0 Freezeprotection,overheatingprotection
0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheoutdoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point3)).
0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheindoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point4)).
0Coolingprocessstoppedduetoalowoutdoortemperature,heatingprocessstoppedduetoahighoutdoortemperature.
08 Compressorquantitychangeover,stoppage.
0 4-wayvalvechangeoverstoppagerequest(FXonly).
0 Stoppagerequest,forcedstoppage.
Retryduepressureratereduction.
2 Retryduetoincreasedlowpressure.
Retrydueincreasedhighpressure.
Retryduetoabnormalcurrentintheconstantspeedcompressor.
Retryduetoabnormalhightemperatureofthedischargegas,excessivelylowsuctionpressure.
Retryduetoreducedoverheatingofthedischargegas.
Retryduetoinverterdisconnection.
8 Retryduetovoltagereduction.
Expansionvalveopeningchangeprotection.
20 Indoorunitoperationmodechangeover(seebottomnotesectionpoint5).
2 Forcedthermostatdeactivationwhendeactivatedonanotherindoorunit.
22 Hot-startafter4hourswithoutdooruniton.
2 Thermostatoffduringenergy-savingmode.
Tab. 21
NOTE
1. Explanation of terms: Thermostat on: A condition where the indoor unit requests compressor activation. Thermostat off: A condition where the indoor unit does not request compressor activation.
2. Although the stoppage is caused by an "alarm", it does not always indicate "02".3. If the transmission between the control printed circuit boards of the inverter and the control is not made within 30 seconds, a stoppage
will occur due to cause d1-05 and alarm code "04" may be displayed.4. If the transmission between the indoor and outdoor units is not made within 3 minutes, the indoor units will stop.
In this case, the stoppage is due to cause d1-06 and alarm code "03" may be displayed.5. The FSN system will read 20 when different modes are selected for indoor units.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
5� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Abnormal operation occurrence counter
15 Abnormaloperationoccurrencecounter E 0
16 Indoorunitinstantaneouspowerfailureoccurrencecounter. E2 00
17 Remotecontroltoindoorunittransmissionerroroccurrencecounter. E 00
18 Abnormalinverteroperationoccurrencecounter. E 00
- Counts up to ��.- For counts above "��”, it will always read "��".
NOTE
- If a transmission error lasts for more than 3 minutes, one occurrence is added to the counter. - Stored data can be deleted by following the instructions given in section 2.2.6.4. "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote
control".
Step No. Indication of automatic swing louver status
19 Swinglouversensor. F 00
- 00 : Normal - FF : Abnormal
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
20 Dischargepressure(high)(x0.1MPa). H 8
21 Suctionpressure(low)(x0.01MPa). H2 0
22Controlinformation:Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. H
23Operatingfrequency(Hz):Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. H
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
57PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Indoor unit capacity indication
24 Indoorunitcapacity. J 08
Theindoorunitcapacityisindicatedasshowninthefollowingtable:
Indoor unit capacity code
IndicationcodeEquivalentcapacity
in(CV)
06 0,8
08 1
10 1,3
13 1,5
14 1,8
16 2
18 2,3
20 2,5
22 2,8
26 3/3,5
32 4
40 5
48 6
64 8
80 10
Tab. 22
25
Outdoorunitcode:“n”indicatesthetotalnumberofindoorunits.
J2 Fnn = ~ , , A, , C, d, E, F, U(10) (11) (12) (1�) (1�) (15) (1�)
26Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J3:01~16(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),decimal
indication:J 0
27Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J4:00~0F(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),hexadecimal
indication(16numbers).J 00
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
28 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. L 20
29 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. L2
30OutdoorunitMV2expansionvalveopening.-Formodelswithnoexpansionvalve,thesamevaluewillappearonbothMV2andMV1 L
31OutdoorunitMVBexpansionvalveopening.-FXNonly. L 00
Step No. Estimated electrical current indication
32Compressorcurrent.-Thetotalcurrentisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce.
Fortheinvertercompressor,theoperatingcurrentfromtheprimarysideoftheinverterisindicated.P 2
33 Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
58 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
II. Content of check mode 2
Whenmorethanthreeindoorunitsareconnectedtooneremotecontrol,onlythemostrecentdatafromthethreefirstindoorunitsconnectedinsequencewillbeshown.Pressing“}”ontheTEMPbuttontakesyoutothenextscreen,whilepressing“~”onthesamebuttontakesyoutothepreviousscreen.
Indicationoftemperature,etc.
Categorycodeindication
Step No. Temperature indication
1 Indoorunitairinlettemperatureinthethermistor(°C). 2
2 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperatureinthermistor(°C). 2 0
3 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(freezeprotection)(°C). 2
4 Outdoortemperature(°C). 2
5 Indoorunitheatexchangergaspipingtemperature(°C). 2
6 Evaporatingtemperatureinheatingmode(°C). 0
7Controlinformation-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. --
8Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-Whentwocomponentsarerunningsimultaneously,theaveragetemperatureisgiven. 8
NOTE
• Possible abnormal conditions
TEMPERATURE INDICATION FAULT
--Open circuit on any thermistor except 2
Check that the PCB is not reading the thermistor incorrectly. Consult the "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control" section
2Open circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
FF or 2
Short-circuit in any thermistor except 2
2Short-circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
During transitory periods, such as on start-up, the "--" or "00" indicator may appear for a limited time.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
5�PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
9Controlinformation-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.-FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning.
8
10Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsisgiven. A 0
11Remotecontrolthermostattemperature-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.-Ithasnospecificmeaning.
12Operatingfrequency(Hz)-Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. C
Step No. Indication of the expansion opening
13 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. d 20
14 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. E
Step No. Estimated electrical current indication
15Compressor operating current-Thetotalvalueisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. F 20
16 Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.
2.1.6.4. Checking procedure for each main component
PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control
Use the following troubleshooting procedure to check the PCB in both indoor and outdoor units.Step No. Action required Image
1 StopthemachinebypressingtheRun/Stopbutton. PressRUN/STOP
2PCBcheckmode:Press and hold both buttons for � seconds.
TEMP OK} 5
3Indicationofthenumberoftheoutdoorunit(RN)andindoorunit(ADDS)towhichtheremotecontrolisconnected.
e.g.:Indicationofunitno. “0”
:
4After7seconds:AutomaticPCBoperationcheck.
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�0 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required
5After5seconds(maximum30sintheeventofatransmissionfailurebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits):Thedisplaywillindicateamaximumof3typesofFAULTS.
Types of abnormal condition
Abnormaloperationcondition(1)
After1secondAbnormaloperationcondition(2)
After1secondAbnormaloperationcondition(3)
Codes:
Indication Condition
00 Normal
Abnormalcondition(opencircuit,short-circuit,etc.)onacircuitfor:
0 Airinlettemperaturethermistor
Indoor unit PCB
02 Dischargeairtemperaturethermistor
0 Liquidpipingtemperaturethermistor
0 Abnormalremotethermistor
0 Liquidpipingtemperaturethermistor
0 Remotesensor
08 Transmissionfromcentralstation
0A EEPROM
0 Zero-crossinputfault
EE Transmissionfromindoorunitsduringcheck
0 Transmissionfromoutdoorunit
Outdoor unit PCB
F Faninletinternalthermostatfault
F PSWinputfault
F PSHprotectionsignaldetectioncircuit
F Phasedetection
F8 Transmissionfrominverter
FA Highpressuresensor
F Dischargegastemperaturethermistorofthecompressor
FC Lowpressuresensor
Fd Heatexchangerevaporationtemperaturethermistor
FF Ambientairtemperaturethermistor
Tab. 23
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�1PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required Image
6 Pressbutton
7 Ifthereisanotherunit.Nextunitself-checkindication.TEMP} ~
8 e.g.:Indicationofunitn°“2”.:
9 After7seconds.
10From1to5seconds.
11 After1second. J3 J4 J2
12 Pressbutton SwitchoffPCBcheckmode
NOTE
- If this condition persists and alarm code “J1” is not displayed, this means that none of the indoor units have been connected to the remote control. Check the wiring between the remote control and the indoor unit.
- During this troubleshooting procedure, the following PCB parts cannot be checked. - Indoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit, ventilation circuit, protection circuit - Outdoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit.- If this system troubleshooting procedure is run through the central station, the central station indication may change during the
procedure. Please note that this is normal.- After this troubleshooting procedure is complete, the memory of the meter storing the abnormal conditions described above will be
erased.
Tocarryoutthepreviouscheckusingawirelessremotecontrolwithareceiverbuiltintoanindoorwalltypeunit,usethefollowingprocedure:
1. Switch off the power source.2. Disconnect connector (CN25) on PWB(M).�. Connect the PC-P2HTE.�. Switch on the power.
Oncecheckiscomplete,switchoffthepowersourceagainandreconnecttheconnectorsastheywerebeforethecheck.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�2 PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.6.5. Remote control self-checking procedure
WhentousetheOKbutton:1.Whentheremotecontroldisplaysanoperatingfault.2.Forperiodicmaintenancechecks.
Step No. Action required
1 Switchonthepowersource.
2Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.(Thebuttonsmaybepressedwhenthesystemisrunning)
TEMP MODE
} ~ 5
3
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
âFor1second
2
âFor1second
3
âFor1second
4
âFor1second
5
âFor3seconds
TodeleteEEPROMmemoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.
TEMP MODE
} ~ 5Goto 11
4 OncetheLCDscreenhaschanged,theRUNindicatorwillflashtwice. 01
5
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Pressallbuttons(13),oneatatime.Eachtimethebuttonispressed,theindicationnumbershowninpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagramwillincreasebyone.-Thecheckcannotproceedtothenextstepuntilallthebuttonsarepressed.
0002
NOTE
The buttons may be pressed in any order.If two or more switches are pressed at once, the action is not valid and is therefore not registered.
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
��PC - P2HTE TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required Image
6
TheLCDwillchange,asshownbelow:Theremotecontrolwillbegintocheckthetransmissioncircuitautomatically.-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononthetransmissioncircuit,theLCDscreenwill
remainasshowninthediagramontheright,andthecheckwillnotproceedtothenextstep.
03
7
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow:Thetemperaturedetectedbytheremotecontrolthermostatisindicatedinpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagram:
2004
NOTE
If the “--” or “FF” indicators are displayed in part “A”, the remote control thermostat is faulty.
8
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow. 05
IftheRESETbuttonispressedornobuttonsarepressedfor15seconds,alldataintheremotecontrolEEPROMmemorywillbeerased.Atthispoint,thenumberisindicatedinpart(A)asshownbelow.Whenthenumber“”appears,theEEPROMmemoryisfaulty.Ifthenumberindicatedinpart(A)is“”,thecheckwillnotproceedtothenextcomponent.
0005
9TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Afterafewseconds,theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically. 06
10ErasingtheEEPROMmemory(fromstepNo.3).TheLCDscreenwillchangeasshownbelow,andtheremotecontrolwillerasetheEEPROMmemoryautomatically.
07
11Afterafewseconds,theLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically.Inthiscase,thesystemwillnotstarttorunautomatically.
08
PC-P2HTE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P2HTETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.1.7. Remote control optional accessories
2.1.7.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5colourbeige(2twistedcables) Ø1.32
(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCBside
Remotecontrolside
A B
Cablecolour
Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-�0E1 �0 TPC
Tab. 24*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
2.1.7.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 25
Remote control optional accesories
Table of contents
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�5PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.2. PC-P1HE................................................................................................67
2.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................67
2.2.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................672.2.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................68
2.2.2. Dimensiondetails...................................................................................68
2.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................69
2.2.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................692.2.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................692.2.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................702.2.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................702.2.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................712.2.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................72
2.2.4. Operation................................................................................................72
2.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................732.2.4.2.OperationModeSelectionProcedure................................................................74
2.2.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................78
2.2.5.1.PC-P1HEcommandfunctions............................................................................782.2.5.2.Optionalfunctionslist.........................................................................................792.2.5.3.Remotecontroloptionalfunctions......................................................................82
2.2.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................87
2.2.6.1.Abnormaltransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandindoorunit..................872.2.6.2.Troubleshootingprocedureforunitsconnectedtotheremotecontrol................872.2.6.3.Troubleshootingoncheckmode.........................................................................892.2.6.4.Checkingprocedureforeachmaincomponent..................................................972.2.6.5.Remotecontrolself-checkingprocedure............................................................100
2.2.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................102
2.2.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1022.2.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................102
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
General details
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�7PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2. PC-P1HE
2.2.1. General details
2.2.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features:
- Excellent display thanks to a large LCD screen and a simple indication and reading function for programme variables and possible alarms.
- Excellent air-conditioning control thanks to the timer option, allowing the users to adjust the A/C unit operation setting schedules.
- Built-in self-diagnostic function. A warning system indicates any malfunction or problem by triggering and alarm code with detailed information about the alarm.
- All indoor unit functions can be selected and adjusted using the remote control.
- Up to 1� indoor units can be controlled on the same operation mode.
- This remote incorporates a thermistor on the bottom right hand side which allows the user better adjust the desired room temperature, thanks to the installation of a sensor closer to the air-conditioned area.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that with two units installed, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.
Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:
Individual Remote Controls Remote receivers Wireless receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9 Receiver-FSNMPC-P5H PC-RLH8 Receiver-FSN1M
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
This remote control is 100% compatible with the following indoor units:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407C
RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7ERPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7ERPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7RRPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7ERPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPK-FSG2M* RPK-FSNM* RPFI-G7E
RCD-FSG(1/2) RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCI-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*RPF-FSG2Ei RPIM-FSNERPFI-FSG2Ei RCIM-FSNE
Tab. 2
* In these cases, the built in wireless receiver must be disconnected
General Details and Dimensions details
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�8 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.1.2. Maintenance advantages
I. Alarm codes
There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit. The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures.
II. Test run from the remote control
Auto-diagnostic: Quick diagnostics function for controller cards, cards in connected indoor units and cards in outdoor units (PCBs) using the LCD screen.
Remote control data storage: The remote control stores all information on the status of the units at the time when the last system alarm was triggered, allowing the user to easily ascertain the cause of the alarm and resolve the problem. The remote control memory stores all of the pre-configured information of both the remote control and the connected units.
Optional function settings:• Various optional functions on the indoor units (IU) can be activated or deactivated using the remote control, for example:
-Calibrationphaseshiftof4SDgrCinheatingmode(seeTab.6,point).-Fanspeed-Thermostat,etc.
• Several indoor units (IU) can be adjusted at the same time or their configuration can be changed after installation.
2.2.2. Dimension details
15120
120
20
MEDHIGH ON/OFFTIMER TEMP.SET
UNIT
T.RUNABNML
VENT
A/C CENTRALH.STRG
DEFROSTNOFUNCTION
SERVICE
CHECKFILTER
LOW ADDSRNHR
FAN
DRYAUTO
HEATCOOL
LOUVERSWING
TEMPRUN/STOP
Fig. 1
Installation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.3. Installation
2.2.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.2.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 3
NOTE
Do not install the remote control in the following places:- Within the reach of children.- Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.
Installation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
70 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
Alleast50mm
Fig. 2
2.2.3.4. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4). - All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Cabletie 1 Forattachingthecabletotheringcore
Ringcore 1 Forsecuringthecables
Tab. 4
Installation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
71PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.3.5. Installation procedure
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section as indicated in Fig. 3.
Screwdriver
BracketGroove
Hendiduras
SoporteDestornilladorScrewdriver Bracket
Groove
Bracket
Indentpart
Fig. 3
2. Place the control unit in the housing, as indicated below (2 examples):
I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.
TerminalA TerminalB
- Secure the bracket to the wall using the 2 screws provided.
- Insert the cable through the hole in the control unit. A hole can be made in the top centre and top left hand side (at the top in the image).
- Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.
Fig. 4
II. If using an electric control box.
There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example:-Electricalboxforonecontrolunit(withorwithoutcover.)-Electricalboxfor2controlunits(withorwithoutcover.)-Othertypesofbox
1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.
2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.
3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.
$ CAUTION
Make sure the cable is not loose and that the length is correct. If it is left loose, it may become pinched when the control unit is fitted to the bracket, possibly causing an operational fault.
Fig. 5
Installation and Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
72 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
�. Strip the cable insulation and connect to terminals A and B.
Connecttheterminals
Fig. 6
5. Control unit assembly procedure-Insertthehooksonthecontrolunitintotheholesontopofthebracket.-Pushthebottompartoftheunittowardsthebracket.-Aclicksoundindicatesthatthecontrolunitissecuredtothebracketandtheassemblyprocedureiscomplete.
2.2.3.6. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
For operational and safety purposes, fit the ring core "attachment" when installing the unit.
- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in Fig. 7, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.
- If the cable measures 0.75mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.
- Secure the cable using the cable tie (accessory).
This diagram shows an example of a standard connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.
Fig. 7
2.2.4. Operation
NOTE
- If the LOW fan speed is selected and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.
- When the system is started after being out of use for more than 3 months, we recommend that the system is checked by the service provider.
- If the system is not going to be used for a long period of time, turn it off at the mains. Otherwise it will continue to consume electricity, since the oil heater remains on even when the compressor is off.
Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
7�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.4.1. Description
Fanspeedindicator:Indicatesthefanspeedselected:HIGH,MEDorLOW
Fig. 8 Model: PC-P1HE
Operationmodeindicator:Indicatestheoperationmodeselected:FAN,COOL,HEAT,DRYorAUTO
Runindicator(redpilotlight)
Ventilationindicator:Indicateswhetherthetotalheatexchangerhasbeenselected*.
(*see3.1.4.1.III)A/C airconditioningonlyVENTI totalheatexchangeronlyA/C+VENTI ifbothareselected
RUN/STOPbutton
MODEbutton
FANSPEEDbutton
Panelupanddownoperationbutton
VENTIbutton(ventilatoroperation)
LOUVERbutton(oscillatinglouveroperation)
�TIME button (time setting) (Increases or reduces the time set for the timer operation).
ON/OFFTIMERbutton(starts/stopstimer).Usedtoactivateordeactivatethetimerfunction.
CHECKbutton
RESETbutton(resetsfilter)Aftercleaningtheairfilter,presstheRESETbutton.TheFILTERmessagewilldisappearandthenextfiltercleaningtimewillbeset.Itcanalsobeusedtoexitthecheckmodeandtheoptionalfunctionconfigurationmode.
TEMPbuttons(temperaturesetting)
T.RUNindicator(testrunindicator)CHECKindicatorTheseindicationsaredisplayedduringTESTRUNandCHECKoperations.
ABNMLindicator(alarm)FILTERindicatorPanelup/downindicator
SETTEMPindicator(temperaturesetting)Timer ON/OFF ( timer operation indicator)Alarm code indicatorNOFUNCTIONindicator(indicateswhenakeyhasnofunction)ADDSindicator(indoorunits)RNHR:RNindicator(refrigerantcyclenumber)andHR(hoursofservice)SERVICEindicator(servicemode:indicatesaswitchtospecialfunctions)
CENTRAL (central control operation indicator) Indicates control of the central station or CS-Net. DEFROST indicator
Louverindicator.
Tab. 5
Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
7� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.4.2. Operation Mode Selection Procedure
I. Procedure for operation in cooling, heating, dehumidifying and ventilation modes
• Switch on the power.TwoverticallinesaredisplayedontheLCDdisplaytogetherwiththeA/CorVENTIindications.
• Press the MODE button.Bypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillchangefromCOOLtoHEAT,DRYandFANmodes(orfromCOOLtoDRYandFANincoolingonlymodels).(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhenCOOLmodeisselected).
• Press the RUN/STOP button.Therunindicatorwilllightup(red).Thesystemwillstartupautomatically.
NOTE
Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction: Once this setting is made it is stored in the memory and therefore does not need to be set again every day. To change this setting, refer to the "II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction" section.
• Turn off (STOP)PresstheRUN/STOPbuttonagain.Therunindicator(red)willgooff.Thesystemwillstopautomatically.
NOTE
The fan may run for a further two minutes or so after stopping the system in heating mode.
II. Procedure for setting the temperature, fan speed and louver direction.
NOTE
- If the CHECK button is pressed for more than three seconds in operation mode, the unit will switch to check mode (CHECK).- In check mode (CHECK), by pressing the CHECK button once the user can view the different variables using the TEMP or
buttons.- To return to operation mode, press and hold CHECK for more than three seconds and then press CHECK twice.
• Setting the temperatureSetthetemperaturebypressingtheTEMPorbuttons.Thetemperatureincreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(max.30°C).Thetemperaturedecreasesby1°Cwhenthebuttonispressed(min.19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode).(Thefigureshowsthetemperaturesetto28°C).
• Setting the fan speedPresstheFANSPEEDbutton.BypressingtheFANSPEEDbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorwillswitchfromHIGHtoMEDandLOW.TheunitisdesignedandsizedforoptimumoperationwiththefansettoHIGH.(ThefigureshowstheMEDspeedsetting.)
NOTE
In DRY mode, the fan speed changes automatically to LOW and cannot be changed (although the indicator will still show the current setting).
Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
75PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
• Setting the louver direction1. PressingtheLOUVERbuttonstartsthelouver.Thelouveroscillatesatapproximately70°fromthehorizontaltovertical
position.Whenthe“ “symbolmoves,thisindicatesthatthelouverisoscillating.
2. Whenthelouveroscillationfunctionisnotrequired,presstheSWINGLOUVERbuttonagain.Theoscillatorwillstop(althoughnotimmediately,asindicatedinpoint3)attheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ “symbol.
3. Bycommandingthelouvertomovetoaspecificposition,itwillmovefromtheinitialpositiontoverticalandwillthenriseagaintothehorizontalposition,beforefinallymovingtothepositionindicatedbytheuser.
• Fixed positionForcoolingmodes,theairoutletanglecanbesettooneof5differentpositions.Inheatingmode,itcanbesettooneof7positions.
• Automatic oscillation positionThelouverpositionindicatorswillmovecontinuouslyaccordingtotheoscillationofthelouver.
NOTE
- In heating mode, the louver angle changes automatically.- There is a phase shift between the actual angle of the louver and that indicated on the LCD screen. When the SWING LOUVER button
is pressed, the louver does not stop immediately. It will move an oscillate again before stopping. - To find out the exact louver angles, check the corresponding catalogue for the unit installed.
III. Ventilation mode procedure
NOTE
This function is only available when the total heat exchanger is connected*. When carrying out the following procedures without the total heat exchanger connected, the NO FUNCTION indication will flash for 5 seconds.*Total heat exchanger: When adjusting the temperature, the indoor unit will release air from inside the room and replace it with air from outside. To adjust the air from outside to the temperature setting inside the room, it is passed through the total heat exchanger. The air pre-treated (pre-conditioned) in this heat exchanger is routed to the indoor unit where it is conditioned and then circulated into the room.
• VentilationPressVENTIbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,theindicatorchangesfromA/CtoVENTIandA/C+VENTI.(ThefigureshowstheA/C+VENTIsetting).
NOTE
If the system mode is changed to VENTI during individual air conditioning system operation, the system will switch off. If the system mode is changed A/C during individual operation of the total heat exchanger, it will switch off.
Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
7� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
IV. Automatic COOL/HEAT mode procedure
AutomaticCOOL/HEATmodemustbeconfiguredasanoptionalfunction.ThisfunctionallowsthesystemtobeswitchedautomaticallytoCOOL/HEATmodebasedonthedifferencebetweenthetemperaturesettingandandthetemperatureofthesuctionair.Iftheintakeairexceedsthetemperaturesettingby3°C,thesystemwillswitchtoCOOLmodeand,ifitis3°Clessthanthetemperaturesetting,thesystemwillswitchtoHEATmode.
NOTE
- If the heating function is set to LOW, the overload protection devices will often shut-off the system. When this happens, set the fan speed to HIGH or MED (medium).
-If the outdoor temperature is above 21°C, the system will not operate in heating mode.
V. Timer mode procedure
• Press the ON/OFF TIMER button.ON TIMER appears when the system is off. OFF TIMER appears when the system is on. (The figure shows the setting for ON TIMER).• Press the TIME ∆ or ∇ button and set the time required.
The time increases �0 minutes when the ∆ button is pressed (max. 2� hours) and is reduced �0 minutes when the ∇ button is pressed (min. 0.5 hours).If the time is not set, it will automatically be configured to 8.00 hours. (The figure shows a timer setting at 8.5 hours)• To cancel the settingPress the ON/OFF TIMER button again.
VI. Indications in normal conditions
• Thermo-controllerWhenthethermo-controllerisoperating,thefanspeedchangestoLOWandtheindicationisnotchanged.(Heatingmodeonly.)
• DefrostWhenthesystemisrunningindefrostmode,theDEFROSTindicationwillappear.Thefanoftheindoorunitwillslowdownorstop(asselected).Thelouverwillstopinthehorizontalpositionat35°.However,theindicatorontheLCDscreenwillremainon.(ThefigureshowsthesystemstatuswhensettoDEFROST.)
Whentheunitstopsduringdefrostmode,therunindicator(green)willswitchoff.However,thesystemwillcontinuetodisplayDEFROSTandtheunitwillstart-uponcethedefrostmodeiscomplete.
• FilterCloggedfilter:TheFILTERindicationwillappearwhenthetimeprogrammedinfunctionb4(seeTab.6andTab.7)expires,indicatingthatitneedstobecleaned.Cleanthefilter:PresstheRESETbuttonaftercleaning.TheFILTERsignwillturnoff.
Operation
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
77PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
VII. Indications in abnormal conditions
• Abnormal conditionThe run indicator (green) will flash. The ALARM indicator will be displayed on the LCD screen. The screen will also indicate the number of the indoor unit, the alarm code and the model code. If several indoor units are connected, these indications will be displayed for each one, one at a time. Note down the indications and contact your HITACHI service provider.• Power failureAll on-screen indications will disappear. When the unit stops due to a power failure, it will not restart automatically, even when the power is restored.In the event of a power failure lasting no more than 2 seconds, the unit will restart automatically.• Electrical noiseThere may be cases when all of the display indications are off and the unit is stopped. This is because the microcomputer has switched on to protect the unit from electrical noise.
NOTE
-��In�cases�where�a�wireless�remote�control�is�being�used�for�the�indoor�wall�type�unit,�remove�the�connectors�(CN25)�connected�to�the�indoor�PCB.�Otherwise,�the�unit�will�not�work.�
-�Stored�data�cannot�be�deleted�unless�the�remote�control�is�reset.
Indoorunitnumber
Alarmcode
CodeModel
Numberofconnectedindoorunits
Alarmcode
Alternateindicationeverysecond
Model number
Indication Model
H Heatpump
P Inverter
F Multiple
C Coolingonly
E Other
IVX,individual
operation
L KPI
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
78 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.5. Optional functions
2.2.5.1. PC-P1HE command functions
Theremotecontrolchangestheoptionalsettingmodewiththefollowingprocedures.Theoptionalfunctionsareprogrammedusingtheremotecontrol.
• Programming and setting modeCheckthattheunitisoff,pressandholdtheremotecontrolbuttons"CHECK"and"RESET"simultaneouslyforatleast3secondsandthecontrolwillchangetothefieldsettingmode.Oncethemodeischanged,theunitwilldisplaythe"SERVICE"indication,withthenumber“0”flashbelowit.
• Optional setting mode. Selecting SERVICE 0Inprogrammingandsettingmode(mentionedabove),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”andthenumberflashingbeneaththe“SERVICE”indicationwillchange(0<=>02).Settheflashingnumberto“0”,press"CHECK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.
• Selecting the indoor unita.Inoptionalsettingmode,selectingSERVICE0willchangetheindicatoronthe
remotecontroldisplay,asshowninthefollowingdiagram. Indication"0”willbeactivated. Theaddressoftheindoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetis
indicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"ADDS"appearingbelow.
Therefrigerantcyclenumberoftheoutdoorunitonwhichtheoptionalfunctionistobesetisindicatedinthetimersettinghourindicationsection,with"RN"appearingbelow.
Thesettingtemperatureindicationisdeactivated.
b.Atthepointmentionedabove(a),presseither“TEMP”or“TEMP”ontheremotecontrolinordertochangetheindoorunitonwhichyouwishtosettheoptionalfunction.
NOTE
- The indoor unit can be selected from among those connected to the remote control.- If the indication for both the address and the refrigerant cycle is "AA", the settings for
all indoor units are the same.
c.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press"CHECK"andtheremotecontrolwillswitchtooptionalsettingmode.
• Changing optional functions and setting conditionsa.Inoptionalsettingmode,theindicationonthecontroldisplaywillchange,asshown
below.
Theindications"ADDS"and"RN"willbedeactivated. Thesettingconditionoftheoptionalfunctionisindicatedinthetimersetting
hourindicationsections. Theoptionalfunctionnumberisindicatedinthesettingtemperatureindication
section.
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
7�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
b. Press the “TIME ▲” or “TIME ▼” button and the optional function indication will change as shown below.
Whenpressing“TIME▲”button
2 2 ... e f2
Whenpressing“TIME▲”button
c. Press "CHECK" and the setting condition of the optional function will change, as shown below.
00 0 ... 08
• Selecting a different indoor unitIfyoupress“TEMP”or“TEMP”whenintheoptionalsettingmode,theconditionoftheremotecontrolchangesothattheindoorunitmaybeselectedtosettheoptionalfunction,asdescribedabove.
• Returning from optional function setting mode to operation modePressthe"RESET"buttontostoretheoptionalfunctionsettingandreturntooperationmode.
2.2.5.2. Optional functions list
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingtheinternalcontrolfunctionsofthe
IU.
Resettingheatingtemperaturecalibration.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoresetadifferenceof4°C.
0 Available
2 Maintainingventilationspeedduringthermostatstoppageinheatingmode.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.
0 Available
C Drainpumpactivatedinheatingmode.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoactivatethedrainpumpinheatingmode.
0 Available
C Selectingstaticpressure. 00 Averagestaticpressure(factorysetting)
ThisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelsinRPIunitsusingtheremotecontrol.0 Highstaticpressure
02 Lowstaticpressure
Increasefanspeed(RCD)(RCI).
00 Normal Thisfunctionisusedtochangethefanspeedforroomswithhighceilings.
0 Speedincrease1
02 Speedincrease2
C Maintainingthefanspeedincreaseduringathermostatstoppageinheatingmode(RCD)(RCI).
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitwhichisinheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC5.
0 Available
C8 Remotecontrolthermistor. 00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol
Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
0 Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
02 Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor
C Selectionoflogicofthecontactusedforexternalcontrols.
00 Normallyopencontact Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicoftheforcedshutdown.
0 Normallyclosedcontact
Tab. 6 Optional functions list (continued on next page)
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
80 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from previous page)
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingthecontrolfunctions
oftheOU
3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoprotectthecompressorwhenitisfrequentlystartedandstopped.0 Available
C Cancellationofthe3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".0 Available
Remotecontrolinternalcontrol
functions
Changingfiltercleaningtimes
00 Standard Thisfunctionallowsyoutochangethetimeindicatedbytheremotecontrolforchangingtheairfilteroftheindoorunit.
0 100hours
02 1200hours
0 2500hours
0 Noindication
Lockingoperationmode 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangetheoperationmode.
0 Available
Lockingthetemperaturesetting
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethesettingtemperature.
0 Available
Lockingunittocooling-onlymode
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesoffheatingmode.
0 Available
8 Automaticcooling/heatingoperation
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionswitchesautomaticallyfromcoolingtoheating.
0 Available
Lockingairflow 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionmakesitimpossibletochangethefanspeed.
0 Available
F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols
00 Primary Thisfunctionisusedwhentworemotecontrolsareinstalledforonesystem
0 Secondary
Settingremotecontroladditional
systems.
d Switchinguniton/offaftermainspowerfailure/restoration.
00 Notavailable. Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.0 Available
d Savingtheunitstatusafteranelectricalpowerfailure.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.
0 Available
Tab. 6 Optional functions list, continued (continued on next page)
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
81PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Control concept Elem. Optional functions Setting Condition Description
Settingadditionalsystemcontrol
functions.
E Coolingmodeusingoutdooraironly.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).
0,02 Available
(KPI)Ventilationmode. 00 Automaticventilation Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.0 Ventilationthroughtotalheat
exchanger.
02 Ventilationbypass(withouttotalheatexchanger)
E2 (Econofresh)Outdoorhumiditysensor.
00 Notavailable Thisfunctionallowstheusertocontroltheoutdoorairintakebasedonthehumiditysensorconnected.0 Available
(KPI)Increasedairsupply. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoensurethattheairpressureintheroomisgreaterthanthepressureintheadjoiningrooms.
0 Available
E (Econofresh)Gassensor. 00 Notavailable Thisfunctionisusedtoforcetherecyclingofairintheroomwhenthegassensor(CO2)isactivated.0,02 Available
(KPI)Previouscooling/heatingperiods.
00 Standard Thisfunctiondelaysthestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.
0 30minutes
02 60minutes
F OFFtimerautomaticsetting. 00 Nofunction ThisfunctionisusedtoautomaticallysettheOFFtimerwhentheunitisstartedupbytheremotecontrol.
0 Disconnectionafter1hour
02 Disconnectionafter2hours
~ ...
2 Disconnectionafter23hours
2 Disconnectionafter24hours
Tab. 6 Optional functions list
ElementsC,C2,C,C,CA,CC,d2,E,E,F,F,F,F,Fhavenofunctionassigned.
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
82 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.5.3. Remote control optional functions
. Resetting heating temperature calibration.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheremotecontrolsettingorset-pointtemperatureandtheindoorunitsuctionairtemperatureneedtobethesame.Instandardheatingmode,thesuctionairtemperatureisgreaterthanthatoftheroom,thereforethesettingtemperatureusediscalibratedtotheindicatedtemperature+4°C.SettingTemperatureUsed=IndicatedSettingTemperature+4°C(b1=0)/+0°C(b1=1)Thisfunctionisusefulwhenthethermistorisremovedfromtheindoorunitsuctionareaandisinstalledinadifferentlocation.Thefollowingtableshowstheindicatedsettingtemperatureandthesuctionairtemperatureafterresettingtheheatingtemperaturecalibration.
2 . Maintaining ventilation speed in the event of a thermostat stoppage in heating mode.Ifthefanspeedchangesto"LOW"whenthethermostatoftheunitisstopped,theairintheroommaybecomestratifiedduetohotairaccumulatingontheceiling.Inthiscase,werecommendtheuseofthecirculationpumpfunctionexplainedbelow.
Thisfunctionmaintainstheventilationspeedwhenaunitrunninginheatingmodehasathermostaticfault.Thiskeepsthemovementoftheairintheroomatthesamelevelaswhenthethermostatisrunning,ensuringauniformairdistribution.Iftheindoorunitisfittedwithanautomaticswinglouver,thiswillalsobekeptrunningwhentheheatingthermostatisdeactivated.
. 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.Whenacompressorisfrequentlystartedandstoppedovershortintervals,itmustbeprotectedbyusingthisfunction.Activatingthisfunctionaddstheminimumthree-minuteoperationmode(astopmodeofaminimumthreeminutesisstandard).IfusingSET-FREE,thisfunctionisconfiguredbydefault.
NOTE
When the safety device is activated or the "ON/OFF" button is pressed, the compressor will stop immediately.
. Changing filter cleaning times.Thefrequencyoftheindicationtocleanthefilterispre-setatthefactory.
However, cleaning times can be changed depending on the condition of the filter, as shown in the following table:
Filter indication periodApprox. 100
hoursApprox. 1200
hoursApprox. 2500
hoursNo indication
Forbuilt-in4-waytype Periodchanged Periodchanged Factorysetting Periodchanged
Remotecontrolliquidcrystaldisplay 0 02
0 or00 (*)
0
Tab. 7
(*)FortheRPKmodel,thefactorysettingis200hours
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
8�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
. Locking the operation mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheoperationmodedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactivated,theselectedoperationmodecannotbechanged.
. Locking the setting temperature.Thisfunctionisusedwhenthesettingtemperaturedoesnotneedtobechanged.Whenactive,theselectedsettingtemperaturecannotbechanged.
. Locking the unit to cooling-only mode.Thisfunctionisusedwhentheunitisrequiredtooperateincoolingmodeonly.ThisfunctioncancelsoutheatingmodeandAUTOautomaticoperationontheunit,leavingitexclusivelyforcoolingoperation.
8 . Automatic cooling/heating operation.Thisfunctionisusedtooperatetheunitsothatitswitchesautomaticallybetweencoolingandheatingmodes.Thisfunctiondoesnotworkwhentheoutdoorunitisacooling-onlymodelorwhen"lockingunittocooling-onlymode”isselected.
. Locking the fan speed.Thisfunctionisusedtolockthefanspeed.Whenactivated,thefanspeedcannotbechangedusingtheremotecontrol.
C . Drain pump activated in heating mode.Thisfunctionisusedtostartthedrainpumpinheatingmode.However,forSET-FREEsystems,theindoorunitsarenotfittedwithhumidifiers.Donotchangethe“00”settingconditionofthe“C”element.
C . High Speed / Static Pressure.ForRCI/RCDunits,thisfunctionisusedtoincreasefanspeedforindoorunitsinstalledinroomswithhighceilings.Therearetwosettings;0speedincrease1and02speedincrease2.ForRPIunits,thisfunctionisusedtochangestaticpressurelevelswiththeremotecontrol.
C . Maintaining the increased fan speed during a thermostat stoppage in heating mode (RCD)(RCI)Thisfunctionisusedtomaintaintheventilationspeedwhenthethermostatstopsinaunitoperatinginheatingmode.ThespeedmaintainedisthespeedsetwithC.
C . Cancellation of the 3 minute minimum forced compressor operation.ForSET-FREEsystems,theaforementioned"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation"describedinfunction()isthestandarddefaultfunction.Thisfunctionisusedtocancelthe"3minuteminimumforcedcompressoroperation".
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
8� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
C8 . Remote control thermistor.Thisfunctionisusedtocontroltheunitusingtheremotecontrolthermistorinsteadofthesuctionairthermistor,althoughthetwocanbeusedtogether.Setto“0”or“02”whenusedevenwhenthefunctionissetto“0”or“02”,ifthetemperaturedetectedisincorrectdue,forexample,toafaultintheremotecontrolthermistor,thesuctionairthermistorintheindoorunitsareautomaticallyusedbydefault.
Thesettingconditionandventilationmodeareshownbelow:
Setting condition
Ventilation mode Description
00 Indoorsuctionthermistorcontrol.
Differentfunctionsforcontrollingtheunitwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
01Controlwiththeremotecontrolthermistor.
02Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorsuctionthermistorandtheremotecontrolthermistor.
Tab. 8
C . Selecting the logic of the contact for external controls.Thisfunctionisusedtoselectthelogicofthecontactfortheforcedshutdowninputsignal.
Thesettingconditionandcontactlogicareshownbelow.
Setting conditionContact
logicSequence
Activation"Open" contact
"Closed" contact
00 ContactA NormalForced
shutdown
01 ContactBForced
shutdownNormal
Tab. 9
d . Switching unit on/off after mains power failure.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored.
NOTE
The unit switches on and off in accordance with the power on/off setting in the event of a power failure. If the failure occurs during a stoppage activated by the remote control, the unit will restart automatically once the power source is restored.
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
85PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
d . Power source on/off.Thisfunctionsavestheunitsettingsifthepowershouldfail.Theunitwillrestartwhenthepowersupplyisrestored,providedthatitwasonbeforethepowerfailure.Thisfunctionisusedtorestarttheunitautomaticallywhenthepowersourceisrestoredafterapowerfailureofmorethan2seconds.Thecompressorunitwillrestartamaximumof3minutesafterthefailure,inadditiontothe2secondsofdowntime.
NOTE
In the event of a power failure when the unit is stopped, it will switch off after the power supply is restored.
E . Ventilation mode (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtosettheventilationmodeofthetotalheatexchanger.
Thesettingconditionandventilationmodeareshownbelow:
Setting condition
Ventilation mode Description
00 AutomaticventilationSelectionofanefficientventilationmode(ventilationwithtotalheatexchangerorventilationbypass)tosaveenergybydetectingtheindoor/outdoortemperaturedifference.
01Totalheatexchanger
ventilation.Theheatexchangeiscontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.
02 VentilationbypassTheheatexchangeisnotcontinuouswhenthetotalheatexchangerisoperating.
Tab. 10
E . Cooling mode using outdoor air onlyThisfunctionallowstheintakeofoutdooraironly,byopeningthecorrespondinggrille(keepingtheindoorairgrilleclosed).
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition
Outdoor cooling mode Description
00 Notavailable Theoutdoorgrilleistotallyclosed.
01 Available Theoutdoorgrilleisfullyopen.
02 Available Theoutdoorgrilleisfullyopen.
Tab. 11
E2 . Increased air supply (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtoincreasetheairsupplyvolumebyincreasingthespeedofthesuctionairfaninrelationtotheoutputairmotor;thisincreasesthepressureintheroomwithagreaterairvolumethantheadjoiningrooms,avoidingtheintakeofcontaminatedairorbadsmells.
Theremotecontrolairflowsettingandtheactualairflowofthetotalheatexchangerwhenthisfunctionisactivatedarelistedbelow.
Remote control air flow setting Total heat exchanger air flowLOW MEDIUM
MEDIUM HIGH
HIGH HIGH
Tab. 12
Optional functions
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
8� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
E2 . Outdoor humidity sensor (Econofresh).Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinletbycontrollingtheairhumidity,openingorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition Humidity sensor Description00 Notavailable Thehumiditysensorisnotavailable.
01 Available Thehumiditysensorisavailable.
Tab. 13
NOTE
If a "HIGH" air flow is set using the remote control, the total heat exchanger air flow will also be "HIGH”, even when the user needs to adjust this function.
E . Previous cooling/heating periods (KPI).Thisfunctionisusedtodelaythestart-upofthetotalheatexchanger.
Thesettingconditionandthedelayperiodareshownbelow.
Setting condition Start-up delay period00 0minutes
01 30minutes
02 60minutes
Tab. 14
E .Gas sensor (Econofresh)Thisfunctionisusedtoadjusttheoutdoorairinlet,controllingthelackofoxygenandanyexcessiveCO2build-upbyopeningorclosingtheoutdoorairinletgrille.
Thesettingconditionisshownbelow.
Setting condition Gas sensor Condition00 Notavailable Thegassensorinletisnotavailable.
01 Available Thegassensorinletisavailable.
02 Available Thegassensorinletisavailable.
Tab. 15
f . OFF timer automatic settingThisfunctionisusedtoruntheOFFtimeroftheindoorunits.
Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Nodisconnection.
01~24 AvailableThereisadisconnectionafter1to24hoursofoperation.Thenumberofthesettingconditionwillbetheamountofhoursafterwhichthedisconnectionwillbecarriedout.
Tab. 16
f2 . Setting remote control as Primary or SecondaryThisfunctionisusedtosettworemotecontrolsconnectedtooneindoorunit:oneasPrimaryandtheotherasSecondary
Setting condition Condition00 Notavailable Theremotecontrolissetasprimary.
02 Available Theremotecontrolissetassecondary.
Tab. 17
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
87PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.6. Maintenance and repair
2.2.6.1. Abnormal transmission between the remote control and indoor unit
Inthiscase,theLEDrunindicatorlocatedatthebottomleftofthescreenwillflashevery2seconds.
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Before analysing these problems, the system must be switched off at the mains.
Problem Cause Check point Action
Disconnectionorinadequatecontactoftheremotecontrolcable.
Cablingproblem Checkthecableandtheconnections. Repairorconnectthecable.
Remotecontrolfault. DifferentcausesCheckremotecontrolusing
theself-checkmode*1.Replacetheremotecontrol,iffaulty.
PCBfault(ontheindoorunitandremotecontrol).
WiredisconnectedfromPCB
Checkconnectors. Connectwirescorrectly.
PCBfault CheckPCBusingtheself-checkmode*2. ChangethePCB,iffaulty.
Tab. 18
*1: Consult section 2.2.6.�. II*2: Consult section 2.2.6.�. I
2.2.6.2. Troubleshooting procedure for units connected to the remote control
Possible causes:
- The remote control cable is broken.- Remote control cable contact failure.- Remote control plate failure.- If the LED run indicator flashes 5 times for 5 seconds, the display will show the unit number and alarm code (see Fig. 9
and Fig. 10).- Note down the code (see Tab. 1�) and request assistance from your distributor.
Unitnumber Alarmcode Modelcode
Refrigerantcyclenumber Numberofunitsconnected
Fig. 9
Model number
Indication Model
H Heatpump
P Inverter
F Multiple
C Coolingonly
E Other
IVX,individual
operation
L KPI
Tab. 19
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
88 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Table of alarm codes
Code No.
Category Abnormal condition Main cause
01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.
0� Transmission Abnormal transmission between the indoor and the outdoor unit
Incorrect wiring. PCB fault. Fuse disconnected. Power supply switched off.
0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB Fan controller transmission fault.
0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller Fan controller transmission fault.
05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.
0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit
Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or insufficient power supply wiring capacity.
07Cycle
Reduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.
08 Increased discharge gas temperature Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.
0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.11
Indoor unit sensor
Inlet air thermistor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor1� Freeze-protection thermistor1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21
Outdoor unit sensor
High pressure sensor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.
22 Outdoor air thermistor2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor2� Evaporating thermistor
2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor
2� Low pressure sensor
�0
System
System with an incorrect connection There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.
�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting Incorrect capacity code setting.
�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.
�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.
�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.
�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.
��
Pressure
Pressure rate decrease protection activation Fault with the compressor, inverter
�� Low pressure increase protection activation Overload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.
�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�� High pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51
Inverter
Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�
Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection Abnormal transmission detection circuit
57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin�� KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor
Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor
EE Inverter Compressor protection �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage
Tab. 20
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
8�PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.6.3. Troubleshooting on check mode
UsetheCHECKbuttonontheremotecontrolinthefollowingcases:1. WhentheLEDrunindicatorisflashing.2. Tomonitorthecauseoftheproblemafterasystemrestartduetoastoppagewith
RUNindicatorflashing.3. Toperformchecksduringnormaloperationorstoppage.4. Tomonitortheinletairanddischargeairtemperatures.
Fig. 10
Check modesCheckmode1: Indicatingthecurrentdata.Checkmode2: Indicatingthedatasavedimmediatelybeforethefault.
Step No. Check modes
Normalmode1
PressthebuttonCHECK
5 foratleast3seconds-Theindicationwillbedelayedsincethetransmissionbetweentheremotecontrolandtheindoorunittakesaround
10seconds.-Alldatamaybedisplayedas“FF”,“-1”or“255”.Thesetemporaryvaluesgeneratedbythesoftwaredonotaffectthe
functionsofthedeviceatall.(Thealarmcodemayalsobedisplayedas“FF”).
2 Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed
Alarmcodeidentifyingthelastfaultthatoccurredontheindicatedunit.Numberoftheconnectedunitoroftheunitforwhichthecheckmodewaspreviouslyset.
ADDS:Numberoftheindoorunitofcycleno.**RN:No.**Refrigerantcycleno.**
3 Forthenext7seconds. 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�0 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Checkmode14 After7seconds
Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.
Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
5 PressandholdthebuttonCHECK
5 foratleast3secondstoentercheckmode2
Ifwecontinueincheckmode1,steps6and7arearepetitionofsteps2and3.Seenoteinpoint8.
6Unitnumberandalarmcodedisplayed
Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
7After7seconds 7-secondintervalforcheckinganotherunit.
Forwards: Press“}”toincreasefrom00to01to02···Backwards: Press“~”toreducefrom15to14to13
8
Notefrompoint5.
NOTE
From check mode 1, the user may only enter check mode 2 - the check mode cannot be switched off
Checkmode29 Press“}”toviewthenextsetofdata.
Press“~”toviewtheprevioussetofdata.
-Incheckmode2,theusercanaccessdatafromthefirstthreeunitsconnectedinsequencetoaremotecontrol.
10 CheckmodeswitchedoffPressandholdthebutton
CHECK
5 foratleast3seconds.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�1PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
I. Content of check mode 1
Bypressing“}”consecutively,thefollowingindicationswillbedisplayed.
Indicationoftemperature,etc.
Categorycodeindication
Step No. Temperature indication
1 Indoorunittemperaturesetting(°C). 22
2 Indoorunitairinlettemperature(°C). 2 20
3 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperature(°C).
4 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(°C). 20
5
Remotesensortemperature(°C).-Thisisonlydisplayedwhenconnectedtoaremotesensor.
Thedisplaynormallyshows“--”.TheRPKseriescannotconnecttoaremotesensor.Theindicationistherefore“--”.
2
6 Outdoorunitambienttemperature(°C). 0
7 Indoorunitheatexchangerrefrigerantgaspipingtemperature(°C). 2
8 Outdoorunitevaporatingtemperatureduringheating(°C). 8 02
9Controlinformation.-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.
FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning. --
10
Dischargegasrefrigeranttemperatureintopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis
given.-Ifthetemperatureexceeds126°C,theindicationwillread“126”.
A
11 Remotecontrolthermostattemperature. 2
NOTE
• Possible abnormal conditions
TEMPERATURE INDICATION FAULT
--Open circuit on any thermistor except 2
Check that the PCB is not reading the thermistor incorrectly. Consult the "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control" section
2Open circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
orShort-circuit in any thermistor except 2
2Short-circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
During transitory periods, such as on start-up, the "--" or "00" indicator may appear for a limited time.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�2 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Microcomputer input/output indication
12 Indoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C Z
HeatThermostaton
ColdThermostaton
Alarm
Operation
YH2
Y52H
Dark
13 Outdoorunitmicrocomputerinput/output. C2 -
Y211
Y212
Y52C1Y52C2
Y20B
Y20A
DarkFanON
PCBrelay PartnameYH2 Relayfordrainpump(MD)and/ordewheater(EHW).Y52H Relayforelectricheater(CEH).Y211
4-wayvalverelay.Y212
Y52C1Compressorrelay.
Y52C2Y20A
Solenoidvalverelay.Y20B
Tab. 21
Symbols with the letter Y are relays on the indoor/outdoor unit PCB plate.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Unit stoppage cause indication
14 Causeofthestoppage. d 0
Codes:
00 Operationstopped,powerswitchedoff.
0 Thermostatswitchedoff(seebottomsectionpoint1).
02 Alarm(seebottomnotesectionpoint2).
0 Freezeprotection,overheatingprotection
0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheoutdoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point3)).
0 Instantaneouspowerfailureintheindoorunit,reset(seebottomnotesection,point4)).
0Coolingprocessstoppedduetoalowoutdoortemperature,heatingprocessstoppedduetoahighoutdoortemperature.
08 Compressorquantitychangeover,stoppage.
0 4-wayvalvechangeoverstoppagerequest(FXonly).
0 Stoppagerequest,forcedstoppage.
Retryduepressureratereduction.
2 Retryduetoincreasedlowpressure.
Retrydueincreasedhighpressure.
Retryduetoabnormalcurrentintheconstantspeedcompressor.
Retryduetoabnormalhightemperatureofthedischargegas,excessivelylowsuctionpressure.
Retryduetoreducedoverheatingofthedischargegas.
Retryduetoinverterdisconnection.
8 Retryduetovoltagereduction.
Expansionvalveopeningchangeprotection.
20 Indoorunitoperationmodechangeover(seebottomnotesectionpoint5).
2 Forcedthermostatdeactivationwhendeactivatedonanotherindoorunit.
22 Hot-startafter4hourswithoutdooruniton.
2 Thermostatoffduringenergy-savingmode.
Tab. 22
NOTE
1. Explanation of terms: Thermostat on: A condition where the indoor unit requests compressor activation.Thermostat off: A condition where the indoor unit does not request compressor activation.2. Although the stoppage is caused by an "alarm", it does not always indicate "02".
3. If the transmission between the control printed circuit boards of the inverter and the control is not made within 30 seconds, a stoppage will occur due to cause d1-05 and alarm code "04" may be displayed.
4. If the transmission between the indoor and outdoor units is not made within 3 minutes, the indoor units will stop. In this case, the stoppage is due to cause d1-06 and alarm code "03" may be displayed.5. The FSN system will read 20 when different modes are selected for indoor units.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Abnormal operation occurrence counter
15 Abnormaloperationoccurrencecounter E 0
16 Indoorunitinstantaneouspowerfailureoccurrencecounter. E2 00
17 Remotecontroltoindoorunittransmissionerroroccurrencecounter. E 00
18 Abnormalinverteroperationoccurrencecounter. E 00
- Counts up to ��.- For counts above "��”, it will always read "��".
NOTE
- If a transmission error lasts for more than 3 minutes, one occurrence is added to the counter. - Stored data can be deleted by following the instructions given in section 2.2.6.4. "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote
control".
Step No. Indication of automatic swing louver status
19 Swinglouversensor. F 00
- 00 : Normal - FF : Abnormal
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
20 Dischargepressure(high)(x0.1MPa). H 8
21 Suctionpressure(low)(x0.01MPa). H2 0
22Controlinformation:Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. H
23Operatingfrequency(Hz):Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. H
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�5PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Indoor unit capacity indication
24 Indoorunitcapacity. J 08
Theindoorunitcapacityisindicatedasshowninthefollowingtable:
Indoor unit capacity code
IndicationcodeEquivalentcapacity
in(CV)
06 0,8
08 1
10 1,3
13 1,5
14 1,8
16 2
18 2,3
20 2,5
22 2,8
26 3/3,5
32 4
40 5
48 6
64 8
80 10
Tab. 23
25
Outdoor unit code: “n” indicates the total number of indoor units.
J2 Fnn = ~ , , A, , C, d, E, F, U(10) (11) (12) (1�) (1�) (15) (1�)
26Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J3:01~16(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),decimal
indication:J 0
27Refrigerantcyclenumber:-J4:00~0F(Refrigerantcyclenumber,configuredwithindoorunitDSW5DipSwitch),hexadecimal
indication(16numbers)J 00
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
28 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. L 20
29 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. L2
30OutdoorunitMV2expansionvalveopening.-Formodelswithnoexpansionvalve,thesamevaluewillappearonbothMV2andMV1 L
31OutdoorunitMVBexpansionvalveopening.-FXNonly. L 00
Step No. Estimated electrical current indication
�2Compressorcurrent.-Thetotalcurrentisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce.
Fortheinvertercompressor,theoperatingcurrentfromtheprimarysideoftheinverterisindicated.P 2
�� Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�� PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
II. Content of check mode 2
Whenmorethanthreeindoorunitsareconnectedtooneremotecontrol,onlythemostrecentdatafromthethreefirstindoorunitsconnectedinsequencewillbeshown.Pressing“}”ontheTEMPbuttontakesyoutothenextscreen,whilepressing“~”onthesamebuttontakesyoutothepreviousscreen.
Indicationoftemperature,etc.
Categorycodeindication
Step No. Temperature indication
1 Indoorunitairinlettemperatureinthethermistor(°C). 2
2 Indoorunitdischargeairtemperatureinthermistor(°C). 2 0
3 Indoorunitheatexchangerliquidpipingtemperature(freezeprotection)(°C). 2
4 Outdoortemperature(°C). 2
5 Indoorunitheatexchangergaspipingtemperature(°C). 2
6 Evaporatingtemperatureinheatingmode(°C). 0
7Controlinformation-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.Ithasnospecificmeaning. --
8Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-Whentwocomponentsarerunningsimultaneously,theaveragetemperatureisgiven. 8
NOTE
• Possible abnormal conditions
TEMPERATURE INDICATION FAULT
--Open circuit on any thermistor except 2
Check that the PCB is not reading the thermistor incorrectly. Consult the "PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control" section
2Open circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
orShort-circuit in any thermistor except 2
2Short-circuit in compressor discharge thermistor
During transitory periods, such as on start-up, the "--" or "00" indicator may appear for a limited time.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�7PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Step No. Compressor pressure/frequency indicator
9Controlinformation-Displaysinternalremotecontrolinformation.-FortheSET-FREEunit,thisindicationshowsthenumberofcompressorsrunning.
8
10Temperatureofthedischargegasinthetopofcompressorchamber(°C).-(Example)Whenseveralcompressorsarerunning,theaveragetemperatureof2compressorsis
given.
A 0
11Remotecontrolthermostattemperature-Indicatesinternalremotecontrolinformation.-Ithasnospecificmeaning.
12Operatingfrequency(Hz)-Thetotalfrequencyisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. C
Step No. Indication of the expansion opening
13 Indoorunitexpansionvalveopening. d 20
14 OutdoorunitMV1expansionvalveopening. E
Step No. Estimated electrical current indication
15Compressor operating current-Thetotalvalueisindicatedwhenseveralcompressorsarerunningatonce. F 20
16 Gobacktostep1,temperatureindication.
2.2.6.4. Checking procedure for each main component
PCB self-checking procedure using the remote control
Use the following troubleshooting procedure to check the PCB in both indoor and outdoor units.Step No. Action required Image
1 StopthemachinebypressingtheRun/Stopbutton. PressRUN/STOP
2PCBcheckmode:Press and hold both buttons for � seconds.
TEMP CHECK} 5
3Indicationofthenumberoftheoutdoorunit(RN)andindoorunit(ADDS)towhichtheremotecontrolisconnected.
e.g.:Indicationofunitno. “0”
4After7seconds:AutomaticPCBoperationcheck.
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
�8 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required
5After5seconds(maximum30sintheeventofatransmissionfailurebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits):Thedisplaywillindicateamaximumof3typesofFAULTS.
Types of abnormal condition
Abnormaloperationcondition(1)
After1secondAbnormaloperationcondition(2)
After1secondAbnormaloperationcondition(3)
Codes:
Indication Condition
00 Normal
Abnormalcondition(opencircuit,short-circuit,etc.)onacircuitfor:
0 Airinlettemperaturethermistor
Indoor unit PCB
02 Dischargeairtemperaturethermistor
0 Liquidpipingtemperaturethermistor
0 Abnormalremotethermistor
0 Liquidpipingtemperaturethermistor
0 Remotesensor
08 Transmissionfromcentralstation
0A EEPROM
0 Zero-crossinputfault
EE Transmissionfromindoorunitsduringcheck
0 Transmissionfromoutdoorunit
Outdoor unit PCB
F Faninletinternalthermostatfault
F PSWinputfault
F PSHprotectionsignaldetectioncircuit
F Phasedetection
F8 Transmissionfrominverter
FA Highpressuresensor
F Dischargegastemperaturethermistorofthecompressor
FC Lowpressuresensor
Fd Heatexchangerevaporationtemperaturethermistor
FF Ambientairtemperaturethermistor
Tab. 24
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
��PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required Image
6 Pressbutton
7 Ifthereisanotherunit.Nextunitself-checkindication.TEMP} ~
8 e.g.:Indicationofunitn°“2”.
9 After7seconds.
10From1to5seconds.
11 After1second. t J3 t J4 t J2 t
12 Pressbutton SwitchoffPCBcheckmode
NOTE
- If this condition persists and alarm code “J1” is not displayed, this means that none of the indoor units have been connected to the remote control. Check the wiring between the remote control and the indoor unit.
- During this troubleshooting procedure, the following PCB parts cannot be checked. - Indoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit, ventilation circuit, protection circuit - Outdoor unit PCB: Relay circuit, DIP switch, option circuit.- If this system troubleshooting procedure is run through the central station, the central station indication may change during the
procedure. Please note that this is normal.- After this troubleshooting procedure is complete, the memory of the meter storing the abnormal conditions described above will be
erased.
Tocarryoutthepreviouscheckusingawirelessremotecontrolwithareceiverbuiltintoanindoorwalltypeunit,usethefollowingprocedure:
1. Switch off the power source.2. Disconnect connector (CN25) on PWB(M).�. Connect the PC-P2HTE.�. Switch on the power.
Oncecheckiscomplete,switchoffthepowersourceagainandreconnecttheconnectorsastheywerebeforethecheck.
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
100 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.6.5. Remote control self-checking procedure
WhentousetheOKbutton:1.Whentheremotecontroldisplaysanoperatingfault.2.Forperiodicmaintenancechecks.
Step No. Action required
1 Switchonthepowersource.
2Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.(Thebuttonsmaybepressedwhenthesystemisrunning)
TEMP MODE
} ~ 5
3
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
âFor 1 second
2
âFor 1 second
�
âFor 1 second
�
âFor 1 second
5
âFor � seconds
TodeleteEEPROMmemoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.
TEMP MODE
} ~ 5Goto 11
4 OncetheLCDscreenhaschanged,theRUNindicatorwillflashtwice. 01
5
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Pressallbuttons(13),oneatatime.Eachtimethebuttonispressed,theindicationnumbershowninpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagramwillincreasebyone.-Thecheckcannotproceedtothenextstepuntilallthebuttonsarepressed.
0002
NOTE
The buttons may be pressed in any order.If two or more switches are pressed at once, the action is not valid and is therefore not registered.
(continued on next page)
Maintenance and repair
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
101PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Step No. Action required Image
6
TheLCDwillchange,asshownbelow:Theremotecontrolwillbegintocheckthetransmissioncircuitautomatically.-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononthetransmissioncircuit,theLCDscreenwill
remainasshowninthediagramontheright,andthecheckwillnotproceedtothenextstep.
03
7
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow:Thetemperaturedetectedbytheremotecontrolthermostatisindicatedinpart(A)ofthefollowingdiagram:
2004
NOTE
If the “--” or “FF” indicators are displayed in part “A”, the remote control thermostat is faulty.
8
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow. 05
IftheRESETbuttonispressedornobuttonsarepressedfor15seconds,alldataintheremotecontrolEEPROMmemorywillbeerased.Atthispoint,thenumberisindicatedinpart(A)asshownbelow.Whenthenumber“”appears,theEEPROMmemoryisfaulty.Ifthenumberindicatedinpart(A)is“”,thecheckwillnotproceedtothenextcomponent.
0005
9TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Afterafewseconds,theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically. 06
10ErasingtheEEPROMmemory(fromstepNo.3).TheLCDscreenwillchangeasshownbelow,andtheremotecontrolwillerasetheEEPROMmemoryautomatically.
07
11Afterafewseconds,theLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow.Theremotecontrolwillrestartautomatically.Inthiscase,thesystemwillnotstarttorunautomatically.
08
Remote control optional accessories
PC-P1HE
Technical catalogue
102 PC-P1HETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.2.7. Remote control optional accessories
2.2.7.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5colourbeige(2twistedcables) Ø1.32
(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCBside
Remotecontrolside
A B
Cablecolour
Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 25*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
2.2.7.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(aprox.)
Tab. 26
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3. PC-P5H1E..............................................................................................105
2.3.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................105
2.3.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1052.3.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................105
2.3.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................106
2.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................106
2.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1062.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1072.3.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1072.3.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1072.3.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................108
2.3.4. Electricalconnection...............................................................................110
2.3.4.1Standardelectricalconnection...........................................................................1102.3.4.2Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1102.3.4.3.Testingprocedure...............................................................................................111
2.3.5. Operation................................................................................................113
2.3.6. OptionalFunctions..................................................................................114
2.3.7. Alarmindication......................................................................................115
2.3.8. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories......................................................117
2.3.8.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1172.3.8.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................117
Table of contents
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
10�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
General details
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
10� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3. PC-P5H1E
2.3.1. General details
2.3.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features:
- Smaller remote control than conventional models.
- Easy to use, making it perfect for installations such as hotels where it will be used by numerous different people.
- Its main function is to set the temperature.
- The unit can be used with 2 remote controls or with a group remote (for a maximum of 1� units) in the same way as a conventional remote control is used.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.
Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:
Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H1E PC-RLH8(RCI)
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
This remote control is 100% compatible with the following indoor units:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407C
RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E
RPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E
RPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R
RPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E
RPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPK-FSG2M* RPK-FSNM* RPFI-G7E
RCD-FSG(1/2) RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCI-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei
RPF-FSG2Ei
RPFI-FSG2Ei
Tab. 2
* In these cases, the built in wireless receiver must be disconnected
2.3.1.2. Maintenance advantages
Whenaproblemoccurs,analarmcodewillimmediatelybedisplayedwithdetailedinformationabouttheerror.
General details
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
105PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.2. Dimension Details
120
70 10
15
Fig. 1
2.3.3. Installation
2.3.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Dimension and installation details Installation
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
10� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 3
NOTE
Do not install the remote control in the following places:- Within the reach of children.- Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.
2.3.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
Ifseveralcontrolunitsaretobeinstalledinaverticalposition,leaveadistanceofatleast50mmbetweenthemtoallowthefrontcovertobeopenedandtoinsertthetoolforremovingthecontrolfromitshousing.
Fig. 2
2.3.3.4. Supply content
NOTE
Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.- Otherwise, contact
the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package.
Name Quant. Comments
Remotecontrol
1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Cabletie 1 Forattachingthecabletotheringcore
Ringcore 1 Forsecuringthecables
Cable(20cm) 1
Tab. 4
Dimension and installation details Installation
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
107PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.3.5. Installation procedure
1.Inserttheendofthescrewdriverintotheindentsonthebottomofthebracket,pushandrotatethescrewdrivertoremovetheremotefromthebracket.Unscrewthebasetoreleasethebracket
Fig. 3
2.Cableconnection.Connectandsoldertheaccessorycabletothecablesuppliedwiththeunit.Insulatethecontactareawithvinyltape.
Fieldsupplycable Accessorycable
Connectionpart
Fig. 4
3.Chooseoneofthefollowinginstallationoptionsforsecuringtheremotecontrol,dependingontheinstallationrequirements:- With remote control cable exposed.- Using an electrical box.- With a bedside table.
I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.
Securethecableholderaccessorytothewallusing2M4screws(accessories).
Fig. 5
II. If using an electric control box.
Therearedifferenttypesofelectricalboxesavailableonthemarketthatcanbeusedforthisinstallation,forexample:
- Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.) - Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box
1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethe
necessarylengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightoftheterminalsAandB.
ScrewsM4(fieldsupply)
Box
Fig. 6
Installation Installation
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
108 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
III. If using a bedside table
Cutaholetoleavetheremotecontrolexposedandpreparethebolts(over140mm),asshowninthediagram.
NOTE
The bolts must be positioned in-line with the spacers (field supply).
Bolt
Fig. 7
Fittheboltsintothefixingbracketandsecurethespacerswithnuts.-Bolt(fieldsupply).-Nut(fieldsupply).-Spacer(fieldsupply).
NOTE
Leave a distance of at least 30mm between the spacer holes.
Bolt(fieldsupply)
Nut(fieldsupply)
Spacer(fieldsupply)
Fig. 8
Removethedecorativecoverandplacetheremotecontrolintheholeforinstallation.
Nut(fieldsupply)
Fig. 9
4.Securetheremotetothebracketusingthescrewsandconnectthecableasshowninthediagram.
Inserttheconnector
Passthecablethroughthehople
Fig. 10
5.Securetheremotetothefixingbracket.Firstconnectthetop,andthenthebottom.
Fig. 11
Installation Installation
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
10�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.4. Electrical connection
2.3.4.1 Standard electrical connection
$ CAUTION
For operational and safety purposes, fit the ring core "attachment" when installing the unit.
- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in the diagram, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.
- If the cable measures 0.75mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.
- Secure the cable using the cable tie (accessory).
Cabletie
Ringcore
Wiringremotecontrol
Fig. 12
This diagram shows an example of a conventional connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.
2.3.4.2 Electrical connection for several units
Thisremotecontrolcancontroluptoamaximumof16units.Ifthissettingischanged,thewiringconnectionandothernecessarytasksmustbecarriedout,asshownbelow.Tworemotecontrolscanbeconnectedtothesameunitorgroupofunits.Thesecondisasecondaryremotecontrol,asshownbelow.Seesection"2.3.6.Optionalfunctions"formoreinformation.
Terminalboard Terminalboard
ScrewsM3.5
ScrewsM3.5
CN1 CN1A AB B
Max.16indoorunits
Twistedpaircable:1P-Atleast0,75mm2
Fig. 13
$ CAUTION
- Use a 0.3 - 0.75 mm2 cable (maximum total cable length: 30m). If the total cable length exceeds 30m, use a twisted pair cable (1P - 0.75mm2) (maximum total cable length: 200 m). If using the remote control timer, the maximum total cable length is 100m. The use of other cables can produce noise, which may lead to a defective system operation.
- The remote control cable/indoor unit transmission cables and the power supply cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.
- If this distance is less than 30cm, install the cables in a conduit (type-D; ≤ 100 Ω) and connect one end to earth. Failure to do so may cause a fault or may cause the air conditioning unit to work incorrectly due to the noise.
- If several indoor units are controlled simultaneously, establish the addresses for the refrigerant cycle and indoor units. This is particularly important when simultaneously controlling indoor units with several refrigerant cycles since abnormal transmission may occur due to duplicate addresses.
- Do not leave any space in the remote control box cable hole. Any space must be covered using vinyl tape for example to prevent problems caused by dew or by insects entering the remote control box.
- To use two remote controls (primary and secondary), see point "2.3.6. Optional Functions".
Electrical connection Electrical connection
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
110 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
I. Field supply communication cable options.
Option 1:-Twistedpaircable,2x75mm²(maximumtotal
length200m).
Unweldedterminal(typex1.25-3X)(Sideofthe
terminalblock)
(Sideoftheremotecontrol)
Fig. 14
Option 2:-Conventionalshieldedcable,2x0.75mm²,for
connectingtheearthshieldingonthesideoftheelectricbox(maximumtotallength200m).
(Sideoftheterminalblock)
(Sideoftheremotecontrol)
Fig. 15
II. Optional accessory cable.
Cables(twistedwire,2x0.75mm²)withdifferentlengthsareprovidedasanoptionalsupplyandarefittedwithconnectors.
Cable reference Cable model Length (m)7E790211 PRC-10E1 107E790212 PRC-15E1 157E790213 PRC-20E1 207E790214 PRC-30E1 30
Tab. 5
2.3.4.3. Testing procedure
1.Switchonthepowersupplytoallindoorunits.2.Modelswithautomaticaddressfunctionwilltakethreetofiveminutestocompletethesettings.3.Setthesystemto“TESTRUN”modefromtheoutdoorunits.
NOTE
- The PC-P5H1E does not have Test Run mode. The test run must be carried out from the outdoor unit.- It takes 3 to 5 minutes to complete the automatic address setting after the power source is switched on.- The total number of units connected is indicated on the liquid crystal display.
Example:When1indoorunitisconnected.
- If the indicated number is incorrect, then there is an abnormal condition such as such as incorrect wiring, electrical noise, etc.
- Switch off the power source and correct the wiring after checking the following points (wait at least 10 seconds before switching the power source on/off)- The indoor unit power source is not connected or the wiring is incorrect.- Incorrect connection of cable between indoor units or incorrect connection of remote control cable.- Incorrect setting of rotary switch (setting overlapped) on PCB of the indoor units.
4.Cancellingtestrunmode- Test Run mode will end automatically after 2 hours.- Test Run mode can be cancelled from the outdoor unit or by pressing the on/off button on the PC-P5H1E.
NOTE
The operation mode during the test is stored on the PC-P5H1E. Once the Test Run is complete, select the operation mode - see point "2.3.6. Optional functions".
Electrical connection Electrical connection
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
111PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.5. Operation
NOTE
If the LOW fan speed is selected on the indoor unit and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed of the indoor unit must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.
Description
SCHEDULEDCHECKindicator:Switchesonduringtestmode.
4
6
7
89
10
11
1
2
3
5
12
13
Fig. 16 Model:PC-ARH (E)
PC-P5H1E
AUTOCONTROLindicator:Appearswhentheoperatingconditionislimited.
Alarmcodeindicator:Appearswhenthereisanabnormalconditionintheairconditioningunit.
Operationmodeindicator:
OUNLED(green):Indicatesthattheunitisrunning.
RUN/STOPbutton:Thisbuttonisusedtostartandstopthesystem.
MODEbutton
:FAN
:COOL
:HEAT
:DRY
:AUTOBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,thesettingwillchangeinsequence:“COOL”,“FAN”,“HEAT”,“DRY”o“AUTO”.”FAN”(torestrictthechangeofoperationmodeH3:01;norestriction,H3:02).
FANSPEEDbuttonBypressingthisbuttonrepeatedly,thesettingwillchangeinsequence.
Swinglouver:Starttheswinglouverbypressingthisbutton.Pressitagaintostoptheswinglouver.Thelouverwillthenstopattheangleindicatedbythedirectionofthe“ ”indicator.
TEMPbutton(temperaturesetting):Thisbuttonisusedtoestablishthesettingtemperature.
Fanspeedindicator.
Swinglouverindicator.
Temperatureindicator.
Tab. 6
Operation Optional functions
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
112 PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.6. Optional Functions
1. Switching to optional setting mode:Pressthe“MODE”and“FANSPEED”buttonsatthesametimeforatleast3secondswhentheairconditioningunitisoff.Thescreenwillchange,asshowninthediagram,whenoptionalsettingmodeisactivated.
2. Changing options and setting elements:Press“VTEMP”tochangecertainsettingelementswhenshown.Tochangesettingoptions,pressthe“TEMP”button.Consultthefollowingtableforsettingelementsandoptions.
Pressthe“VTEMP”buttontoselectsettingelements
Pressthe“TEMP
V
”buttontochangethesettingoptions
3. Cancelling the function selection mode:Toreturntonormalmodefrom2.,pressthe"MODE"and"FANSPEED"buttonsatthesametime.
Optional setting elements
Code Element Setting
b1 Cancellingheatingtemperaturesetting 00:Normal(temperaturesetting+4°C)01:Cancelled(temperaturesetting)02:Temperaturesetting+2ºC*1
b8 Automaticcooling/heatingmode 00:Off01:On
C5 Indoorfanincrease 00:Off01:High102:High2
C8 Remotecontrolthermostat*2 00:Off01:Switchfromindoorinletthermistortoremotecontrol
thermostat02:Unitcontrolusingtheaveragevalueoftheindoorinlet
thermistorandtheremotecontrolthermostat
F2 Settingprimaryandsecondaryremotecontrols 00:Primary00:Secondary
FC Minimumsettingforcoolingtemperature*3 00:Normaltemperaturemargin01-10:Minimumcoolinglimit+1ºC-+10ºC
Fd Maximumsettingforheatingtemperature*4 00:Normaltemperaturemargin01-10:Maximumheatinglimit-1ºC-10ºC
Tab. 7 (continued on the next page)
Operation Optional functions
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
11�PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Code Element Setting
H1 Maintenancealarm 00:Show01:Hide
H2 Noautomaticcontrolindication 00:Show01:Hide
H3 Operationmodechangerestriction*5 00:Operationmodechangeoff(hideoperationmode)(factorysetting)
01:Operationmodesetbythecentralcontrolunit+"FAN"mode
02:Unlimitedoperation
H4 Ventilationchangeover(totalheatexchangeronly)
00:Airconditioningonly01:Ventilationonly02:Airconditioning+Ventilation
H5 Centralcontrolavailableafterforcedstoppage. 00:Off01:On
*1.Certainindoorunitsdonotacceptthesetting“02”.*2.Ifinstalledonabedsidetable,usethesetting“00”.*3.Appliesto“FAN”,“COOL”and“DRY”modes.*4.Appliesto“HEAT”mode.*5.“01”isonlyavailablewhenusingaremotecontrol.Donotusethissettingwhenusingtworemotecontrols
(primary/secondary).
Tab. 7
NOTE
- When connecting several indoor units, the same settings are applied to all units.- To change the settings, wait at least three minutes after switching the power on.- Some indoor and outdoor units do not accept certain settings or do not have the functions that relate to the
activated settings. Check the available settings beforehand.- Note down the option selected in the "settings" column on the table.
2.3.7. Alarm indication
TherunLED(green)willflash.TheLCDscreenwillshowthefollowinginformation:
- No. of indoor unit affected by the alarm.- Alarm code.- Unit model.- No. of indoor units connected to the system.
NOTE
For more information on alarm indications, check the installation and operation manual for the outdoor unit.
Optional functions and alarm indication Alarm indication
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
11� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Table of alarm codes
Code No.
Category Abnormal condition Main cause
01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor, drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.
0� TransmissionAbnormal transmission between the indoor unit (or outdoor) and the outdoor unit (or indoor)
Incorrect wiring. PCB fault. Fuse disconnected. Power supply switched off.
0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB Fan controller transmission fault.
0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller Fan controller transmission fault.
05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.
0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or
insufficient power supply wiring capacity.0�. Voltage drop Voltage drop due to an excessively low or high voltage in the ventilation unit inverter
07Cycle
Reduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.
08 Increased discharge gas temperature Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.
0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.11
Indoor unit sensor
Inlet air thermistor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor
1� Freeze-protection thermistor
1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21
Outdoor unit sensor
High pressure sensor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.
22 Outdoor air thermistor2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor2� Evaporating thermistor
2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor
2� Low pressure sensor
�0
System
System with an incorrect connection There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.
�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting Incorrect capacity code setting.
�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit
Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.
�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.
�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.
�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.
�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.
��
Pressure
Pressure rate decrease protection activation Fault with the compressor, inverter
�� Low pressure increase protection activationOverload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.
�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51
Inverter
Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage
5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)
5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�
Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection Abnormal transmission detection circuit
57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin�� KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor
EE Inverter Compressor protection �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage
Tab. 8
Optional functions and alarm indication Alarm indication
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
115PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.3.8. Remote control optional accessories
2.3.8.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H1E and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5colourbeige(2twistedcables) Ø1.32
(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCBside
Remotecontrolside
A BCable colour Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 9*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
2.3.8.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.
A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 10
PC-P5H1E
Technical catalogue
11� PC-P5H1ETCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
117PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.4. PC-P5H..................................................................................................119
2.4.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................119
2.4.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1192.4.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................119
2.4.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................120
2.4.3. Installation..............................................................................................120
2.4.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1202.4.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1212.4.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1212.4.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................122
2.4.4. Electricalconnection...............................................................................123
2.4.4.1.Electricalconnectionforseveralunits................................................................1232.4.4.2.Checkingprocedure...........................................................................................125
2.4.5. Operation................................................................................................126
2.4.5.1.Description........................................................................................................1262.4.5.2.Start....................................................................................................................1262.4.5.3.Stop....................................................................................................................126
2.4.6. OptionalFunctions..................................................................................127
2.4.7. Alarmindication......................................................................................128
2.4.8. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................130
2.4.8.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1302.4.8.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................130
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
118 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
11�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4. PC-P5H
2.4.1. General details
2.4.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features:
- Smaller remote control than conventional models.
- Easy to use, making it perfect for installations such as hotels where it will be used by numerous different people.
- Its main function is to set the temperature.
- The unit can be used with 2 remote controls or with a group remote (for a maximum of 1� units) in the same way as a conventional remote control is used.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.
Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:
Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H PC-RLH8(RCI)
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
This remote control is 100% compatible with the following indoor units:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407C
RCI-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E
RPI-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E
RPC-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R
RPF-FSG2E RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E
RPFI-FSG2E RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPK-FSG2M* RPK-FSNM* RPFI-G7E
RCD-FSG(1/2) RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCI-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RPI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M*RPC-FSG2Ei
RPF-FSG2Ei
RPFI-FSG2Ei
Tab. 2
* In these cases, the built in wireless receiver must be disconnected
2.4.1.2. Maintenance advantages
Whenaproblemoccurs,analarmcodewillimmediatelybedisplayedwithdetailedinformationabouttheerror.
General details
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
120 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.2. Dimension Details
Fig. 1
2.4.3. Installation
2.4.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Dimension and installation details
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
121PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 3
NOTE
Do not install the remote control in the following places:- Within the reach of children.- Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.
2.4.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
��
��
Atleast50mm
Fig. 2
2.4.3.4. Supply contentPrior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 4).- All components are in perfect condition.- Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Cabletie 1 Forattachingthecabletotheringcore
Ringcore 1 Forsecuringthecables
Cable(20cm) 1
Tab. 4
Installation
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
122 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.3.5. Installation procedure
1.Inserttheendofthescrewdriverintotheindentsonthebottomofthebracket,pushandrotatethescrewdrivertoremovetheremotefromthebracket.
��
Approx. �mm
Flat-head screwdriverIndent part
Fig. 3
2.Cableconnection.Connectandsoldertheaccessorycabletothecablesuppliedwiththeunit.
Accessory cable
(Insulate the contact area with vinyl tape)
Field supply cable
Fig. 4
3.Securetheremotetothebracketandconnectthecableasillustratedbelow.
I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.
Fixthebrackettothewallusingthescrews(accessories)
Insertthecablethroughtheremotecontrolupperhole
Inserttheconnectorintotheterminal
Fig. 5
II. If using an electric control box.
There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one control unit (with or without cover.)
- Electrical box for 2 control units (with or without cover.) - Other types of box1.Passthecablethroughthewallduct.2.Passthecablethroughtheelectricalbox.3.Tosecurethebrackettothebox,makesureyouleavethenecessary
lengthofcable,takingintoaccounttheheightofterminalsAandB.
Screws(M4)(fieldsupply)
Box
Fig. 6
4.Securetheremotetothebracket.Firstconnectthetop,andthentothebottom.
Installation
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
12�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.4. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
For operational and safety purposes, fit the ring core "attachment" when installing the unit.
- Wind the remote control cable around the ring core twice, as shown in the diagram, before connecting it to the indoor unit terminal board.
- If the cable measures 0.75 mm2 or more, the outer insulation must be stripped (only on the part to be wound), otherwise you will not be able to wind the cable around the ring core.
- Secure the cable using the cable tie (accessory).
Remotecontrol
Cabletie
Connectorcord
Ringcore
This diagram shows an example of a conventional connection, with the cable connected to terminals A and B.
Fig. 7
2.4.4.1. Electrical connection for several units
Thisremotecontrolcancontroluptoamaximumof16units.Ifthissettingischanged,thewiringconnectionandothernecessarytasksmustbecarriedout,asshownbelow.Tworemotecontrolscanbeconnectedtothesameunitorgroupofunits.Thesecondisasecondaryremotecontrol,asshownbelow.Seesection"2.4.6.Optionalfunctions"formoreinformation.
Remotecontrol
Electricalboxoftheindoorunit
Terminalboard
M3.5screws
Terminalboard
M3.5screws
PC-P1HEremotecontrol(secondary)
Twisted,shieldedpaircable
Electricalboxoftheindoorunit
Fig. 8
Electrical connection
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
12� PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
-Useatwistedpaircable,2x0.75mm²(maximumtotallength200m).
Twistedpaircable:(2x0,75mm²)
Terminalwithoutwelding(1.25-3Xtype)
Terminalblockside Remotecontrolside
10050
Fig. 9
-Youcanalsousaconventionalshieldedcable,2x0.75mm²,forconnectingtheearthshieldingonthesideoftheelectricbox(maximumtotallength200m).
Conventionalshieldedcable:(2x0,75mm2) Terminalwithoutwelding(1.25-3Xtype)
(Terminalblockside) (Remotecontrolside)
Fig. 10
Optional accessory cable.
Cables(twistedwire,2x0.75mm²)withdifferentlengthsareprovidedasanoptionalsupplyandarefittedwithconnectors.
Cable reference Cable model Length (m)7E790211 PRC-10E1 107E790212 PRC-15E1 157E790213 PRC-20E1 207E790214 PRC-30E1 30
Tab. 5
$ CAUTION
- Use a twisted pair cable (shielded) (2 x 0.75²) as a transmission cable to avoid any operating errors (maximum total cable length 200m). If the total cable length does not exceed 30m, a different type of cable may be used (at least 0.3 mm²).
- The remote control cable and the power supply cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.- If several indoor units are being controlled simultaneously, establish the refrigerant cycle number and the address
of the indoor units as indicated below.
Electrical connection
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
125PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Addressoftheindoorunits:
Mainunit Unit1 Unit2 Unit3 Unit8 Unit9 Unit10 Unit11
Unit4 Unit5 Unit6 Unit7 Unit12 Unit13 Unit14 Unit15
Fig. 11
2.4.4.2. Checking procedure
1Switchonthepowersupplytoallindoorunits.2.Setthesystemto“TESTRUN”modefromtheoutdoorunit.
NOTE
- The PC-P5H does not have Test Run mode. The test run must be carried out from the outdoor unit.- It takes 3 to 5 minutes to complete the automatic address setting after the power source is switched on.- The total number of units connected is indicated on the liquid crystal display.
05 unitExample:When5indoorunitsareconnected.
- If the indicated number is incorrect, then there is an abnormal condition such as such as incorrect wiring, electrical noise, etc.
- Switch off the power source and correct the wiring after checking the following points (wait at least 10 seconds before switching the power source on/off)- The indoor unit power source is not connected or the wiring is incorrect.- Incorrect connection of cable between indoor units or incorrect connection of remote control cable.- Incorrect setting of rotary switch (setting overlapped) on PCB of the indoor units.
3.Cancellingtestrunmode- Test Run mode will end automatically after 2 hours.- Test Run mode can be cancelled from the outdoor unit or by pressing the on/off button on the PC-P5H.
NOTE
The operation mode during the test is stored on the PC-P5H. Once the Test Run is complete, select the operation mode as indicated in the Mode setting section of chapter 2.4.6. Optional functions.
Electrical connection
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
12� PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.5. Operation
NOTE
If the LOW fan speed is selected on the indoor unit and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed of the indoor unit must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.
2.4.5.1. Description
RUN/STOPbutton
Temperaturesettingbutton
FANSPEEDbutton:Lowspeed(LOW)
FANSPEEDbutton:Mediumspeed(MEDIUM)
FANSPEEDbutton:Highspeed(HIGH)
FANSPEED(green)
Temperatureindication
RunLED(red)
Tab. 6
Fig. 12 Model: PC-P5H
2.4.5.2. Start
1.Thestart-upprocesswillbeginwhentheindoorunitisswitchedon.ºC
Fig. 13
2.Setthedesiredtemperaturebypressing.Thetemperaturesettingisdisplayedonthescreen.
3.Selectafanspeedbypressingoneofthefollowingbuttons:,,.Theselectedspeedisindicatedbythegreen
LED.
4.Pressthebutton.TheredLEDwillswitchon.
2.4.5.3. Stop
1.Pressthe.TheairconditioningunitwillstopandallLEDindicatorswillswitchoff.Torestarttheunit,press.
NOTE
- This remote control cannot be used to set the swing louver; this setting must be selected from the central station or with a different remote control.
- This remote control is preconfigured with an auto-swing louver setting.- This remote control can be locked using a central control. Once it is locked, none of the parameters can be
changed.
Operation
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
127PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.6. Optional Functions
Step No.
Operation mode
1- Withtheunitsetonoperationmode(butwiththeunitnotrunning)
2- Switchtofunctionsettingmode.
Todothis,press( )( )and( )simultaneouslyforatleast3seconds
3- Modesetting Pressandselectanoperationmode:
OperationmodeModeNo.
˚C
Temp.
Temp.
Operation mode:A:automaticF:fanC:coolingd:dehumidifyingH:heating
-Setto"Automatic"innormalconditions.
-Iftheremotecontrolissettounavailablefromthecentralstation,themodesettingfunctionwillnotbeavailable.
4- Press( ).
Cancellingtheheatingtemperaturesetting.
AdjustmentModeNo.2
˚CPressandselectanoperationmode:
Setting:0:standard:cancellation
-Iftheindoorunitsaresetto"Standard"and"Cancellation",theindicationwillbe"-"whenispressed;allindoorunitscanbesetto“0”or“”.
5- Press( )twice.Simultaneousoperationsetting(onlyformodelswithtotalheatexchanger*).(*Totalheatexchanger:Whenadjustingthetemperature,theindoorunitwillreleaseairfrominsidetheroomandreplaceitwithairfromoutside.Toadjusttheairfromoutsidetothetemperaturesettinginsidetheroom,itispassedthroughthetotalheatexchanger.Theairpre-treated(pre-conditioned)inthisheatexchangerisroutedtotheindoorunitwhereitisconditionedandthencirculatedintotheroom.
AdjustmentModeNo.
˚C
Pressandselectanoperationmode:
Temp.
Temp.
Setting:0:airconditioning:ventilationI2:airconditioning+ventilationI
6- Press( ).
Primaryandsecondaryremotecontrolsetting.
AdjustmentModeNo.
˚CPressandselectanoperationmode:
Setting:0:primary:secondary
-Whenthissettingischanged,switchoffthepowersourcetoallindoorunitsafterreturningtooperationmode.
7- Gobacktostep1:Press( )( )and( )simultaneously.
Optional functions
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
128 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.7. Alarm indication
TherunLED(red)willflash.Pressandholdthetwotemperaturebuttonsfor3secondsandthenumberofthefirstindoorunittestedwillappear.Pressingthetemperaturebuttonswillswitchbetweenselectedunitsandthenindicatesthealarmcode(seeTab.77),asshownbelow.
1-
˚C
Refrigerantcyclenumber
Indoorunitnumber
After1sec. Model number Model
H UTOPIA
P UTOPIAINVERTER
F SET-FREE
Tab. 7
2-
˚C
Modelcode
Numberofunitsconnected(A~Gindicates10~16)
After1sec.
3-
˚C
Alarmcode After1sec.Gobacktostep1
Table of alarm codes
Code No.
Category Abnormal condition Main cause
01 Indoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor, drain discharge, PCB or relay failure.02 Outdoor unit Protection device activation PSH activation.
0� TransmissionAbnormal transmission between the indoor unit (or outdoor) and the outdoor unit (or indoor)
Incorrect wiring. PCB fault. Fuse disconnected. Power supply switched off.
0� Inverter Anomaly between the inverter and the control PCB Fan controller transmission fault.
0�. Inverter FSN(E)/FXN(E) Abnormal fan controller Fan controller transmission fault.
05 Transmission Abnormal power supply wiring Wiring incorrect, phase inverted.
0� Voltage drop Voltage drop due to excessively low or high voltage in the outdoor unit Voltage drop at the power source. Incorrect wiring or
insufficient power supply wiring capacity.0�. Voltage drop Voltage drop due to an excessively low or high
voltage in the ventilation unit inverter07
CycleReduced discharge gas superheating Excessive refrigerant load. Expansion valve inlet open.
08 Increased discharge gas temperature Insufficient refrigerant load, refrigerant leakage, expansion valve inlet closed or clogged.
0� Outdoor unit Protection device activation Fan motor fault.
Tab. 8 (continued on the next page)
Alarm indication
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
12�PC - P5H TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
(continued from the previous page)
Code No.
Category Abnormal condition Main cause
11
Indoor unit sensor
Inlet air thermistor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.12 Outlet air thermistor1� Freeze-protection thermistor1� Gas piping thermistor15 Fresh air thermistor (Econofresh)1� Activation of the fan motor protection device Fan motor fault.21
Outdoor unit sensor
High pressure sensor
Thermistor, sensor or connection fault.
22 Outdoor air thermistor2� Compressor discharge gas thermistor2� Evaporating thermistor
2� For FSVNE only Suction gas thermistor
2� Low pressure sensor
�0
System
System with an incorrect connection There are more than two CH units connected between the indoor units and the outdoor unit.
�1 Incorrect indoor and outdoor unit setting Incorrect capacity code setting.
�2 Abnormal transmission from another indoor unit
Fault with the power source, PCB or another indoor unit. Fault in another indoor unit on the same refrigerant cycle.
�5 Incorrect indoor unit number setting The indoor unit number already exists on the same refrigerant cycle.
�� Incorrect indoor unit type. Indoor unit is not for R�10A.
�8 Abnormal outdoor unit protection circuit Fault on the indoor unit PCB, incorrect wiring, connection with PCB of the indoor unit.
�� Abnormal operating current in the constant compressor Overcurrent, blown fuse or fault in the current sensor.
��
Pressure
Pressure rate decrease protection activation Fault with the compressor, inverter
�� Low pressure increase protection activationOverload on the cooling of the indoor unit, high outdoor air temperature on the open inlet of the heating expansion valve.
�5 High pressure increase protection activation Overload, excessive refrigerant, clogged heat exchanger�7 Low pressure decrease protection activation Insufficient refrigerant51
Inverter
Abnormal inverter current sensor Fault in inverter PCB sensor52 Overcurrent protection activation Compressor overload, overcurrent, blockage
5� IPM protection activation Automatic IPM stoppage (overcurrent, low voltage or overheating)
5� Increased temperature on the inverter fins Abnormal inverter fin thermistor, abnormal outdoor fan5�
Outdoor fanAbnormal fan motor position detection Abnormal transmission detection circuit
57 Fan controller protection activation Abnormal fan speed58 Abnormal fan controller Overcurrent, abnormal fan controller fin��
KPI unit sensor Room temperature thermistor Thermistor, sensor, connection fault�7 Outdoor temperature thermistor
EE Inverter Compressor protection �-time alarm activation in a period of � hours indicating compressor damage
Tab. 8
Alarm indication
PC-P5H
Technical catalogue
1�0 PC-P5HTCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.4.8. Remote control optional accessories
2.4.8.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmbeigecolour
(twistedandshielded2cable) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)Indoorunit
PCBsideRemotecontrol
side
A BCable colour Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 9*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
2.4.8.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.
A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 10
Remote control optional accessories
1��PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 Table of contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.5. WirelessRemoteControl........................................................................135
2.5.1. GeneraldetailsI.Selectionadvantages..................................................135
2.5.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................135
2.5.3. Installation..............................................................................................136
2.5.3.1.Safetysummary.................................................................................................1362.5.3.2.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1372.5.3.3.Batterycharging.................................................................................................1372.5.3.4.Receiverkit.........................................................................................................1382.5.3.5.Wallinstallation...................................................................................................139
2.5.4. Operation................................................................................................139
2.5.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1402.5.4.2.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................1412.5.4.3.Operationwithseveralindoorunits....................................................................142
2.5.5. Testmodewiththeremotecontrol..........................................................145
2.5.6. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories......................................................146
2.5.6.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1462.5.6.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................146
2.5.7. PC-RLH8receiverkitinstallation............................................................147
2.5.7.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1472.5.7.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1472.5.7.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1482.5.7.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1482.5.7.5.Optionalfunctions...............................................................................................151
2.5.8 PC-RLH9receiverkitinstallation............................................................152
2.5.8.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1522.5.8.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1522.5.8.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1532.5.8.4.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1532.5.8.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................155
2.5.9. PC-RLH11receiverkitinstallation..........................................................156
2.5.9.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1562.5.9.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1562.5.9.3.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1572.5.9.4.Installationprocedure........................................................................................1572.5.9.5.Optionalfunctions..............................................................................................160
1�� PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008Table of contents
2.5.10.PC-RLH13receiverkitinstallation...........................................................161
2.5.10.1.Safetysummary................................................................................................1612.5.10.2.Installationsiteselection...................................................................................1612.5.10.3.Supplycontent..................................................................................................1622.5.10.4.Installationprocedure.......................................................................................1622.5.10.5.Optionalfunctions.............................................................................................165
General and dimension details1�5PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5. Wireless Remote Control
2.5.1. General detailsI. Selection advantages
Wireless remote control that requires no wiring and provides simple one-touch operation.
Two or more units can be controlled simultaneously.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that with two units installed, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.
Compatibleremotecontrolsandreceivers:
Individual Remote Controls Remote receiversPC-P1HE PC-RLH9(RCD)PC-P5H PC-RLH8(RCI)
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
2.5.2. Dimension Details
5x4.6
125
14.2
20
23.4
39.9
36.6
16.4
56.5
56
ø4.5
Fig. 1
Installation1�� PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.3. Installation
2.5.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Installation1�7PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.3.2. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2).- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:Name Quant. Comments
Wirelessremotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
Bracket 1 Fortheremotecontrol
AAA/1.5battery 2 Fortheremotecontrol
Screw 4 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Tab. 2
2.5.3.3. Battery charging
Loadtheremotecontrol'sbatteries(AAA/1.5VX2)asfollows:
1. Remove the battery cover by sliding it in the direction marked by the arrow.
2. Insert the batteries (Insert the batteries according to the + and - marks).
Fig. 2
Installation1�8 PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.3.4. Receiver kit
Areceiverisrequiredinorderfortheindoorunitstoreceivethesignalwhenawirelessremotecontrolisused(PC-LH3A).
Compatiblemodels:
Model On the wall On the panel
Set-Free R407C
RCI-FSG2E
PC-RLH11
RPI-FSG2E
RPC-FSG2E
RPF-FSG2E
RPFI-FSG2E
RPK-FSG2M
RCD-FSG(1/2)
RCI-FSG2Ei
RPI-FSG2Ei
RPC-FSG2Ei
RPF-FSG2Ei
RPFI-FSG2Ei
Set-Free R410A
RCI-FSNE
PC-RLH11
PC-RLH8RPI-FSNE
RPC-FSNE
RPF-FSNE
PC-RLH9RPFI-FSNE
RPK-FSNM
RCD-FSN
PC-RLH13RCI-FSN1E
RPK-FSN1M
Utopia R407C
RCI-G7E
PC-RLH11
RPI-G7E
RPI-G7R
RPC-G7E
RPF-G7E
RPFI-G7E
RPK-G7M
Tab. 3
NOTE
If another remote control is used together with the PC-RLH8/9/11/13, one of them should be set as a secondary remote control by turning pin 1 of the SW3 to the ON position.(consult point 2.5.4.2., III. Secondary receiver kit setting for a wireless remote control)
PC-RLH8
RUN FILTER
DEF
COOLCOOL HEAT
EMERGENCY
TIMER
(Operation/stop) Cooling(Operation/stop) Heating
DIP switch
Fig. 3
PC-RLH9
RUN DEF FILTER TIMER
COOL HEATEMERGENCY
(Operation/stop) Heating
DIP switch
(Operation/stop) Cooling
Fig. 4
PC-RLH11
OPERATION
DEFROST
FILTER
TIMER
EMERGENCY
(Operation/stop) Cooling
(Operation/stop) Heating
DIP switch
Fig. 5
PC-RLH13
RUN FILTER
DEF
COOLCOOL HEAT
EMERGENCY
TIMER
(Operation/stop) Cooling(Operation/stop) Heating
DIP switch
Fig. 6
Installation1��PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.3.5. Wall installation
When the remote control is installed on the wall, ensure it is installed at least �0 cm away from the power supply cable.
Install the bracket (accessory) on the wall using the screws (accessories) and place the remote control on the bracket.
See the CAUTION note in point “2.5.�.1. Safety summary”.
NOTE
If orders are sent via the wall mounted remote, the indoor unit receiver may not receive them since the transmission between the control and receiver may be problematic.See point 2.5.4.1. Operation procedure.
2.5.4. Operation
NOTE
- If the LOW fan speed is selected and the outdoor temperature is above 21 °C, the compressor will be overloaded when the system is used in heating mode. The fan speed must therefore be set to HIGH or MEDIUM as the safety devices may activate.
- When the system is started after being out of use for more than 3 months, we recommend that the system is checked by the service provider.
- If the system is not going to be used for a long period of time, turn it off at the mains. Otherwise it will continue to consume electricity, since the oil heater remains on even when the compressor is off.
Whenthecontrolisused,aimthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationasdescribedinpoint“2.5.4.2.Operationprocedure”.
NOTE
If two indoor units are installed next to each other, the orders from the remote control may be received by both units. The function to identify each particular indoor unit is not available.
Installation and Operation1�0 PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.4.1. Description
TransmitterPointthetransmitterattheindoorunit'sreceivertosendorders.ThetransmissionindicationwillflashontheLCDscreenwhenordersarebeingsent.
Fig. 16 Model: PC-LH3A
Features
Thisremotecontrolisusedtosendordersreferringtotheoperationmode,timersetting,etc.,totheindoorunit.Aimtheremotecontrol'stransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationtosendtheorders(viainfraredrays)totheindoorunit.Themaximumtransmissiondistanceisapproximately6metres.(Thedistanceforaneffectivetransmissionwillbelessifthetransmissionangleinrelationtothereceiverisnotvertical).
Transmissionindication
LCDindicationTheselectedtemperature,timeroperation,louverposition,operationmode,airflowmode,etc.,appearonthedisplay.Thediagramofthedisplayshownontheleftisforguidancepurposesonly.Thedisplaywillchangeduringthedifferentoperationmodes.
OnandoffbuttonUnitoperationcanbestartedorstoppedpressingthisbutton.
FanspeedbuttonPressthisbuttontoselectthefanspeed.Ifthisbuttonispressedrepeatedly,thesettingwillsequentiallychangefromHIGH,MEDandLOW.(ThefanwillworkatLOWspeedforthedryoperationmode).
ModeselectionbuttonIftheMODEbuttonispressedrepeatedly,theunitcycleswillchangeinthefollowingorder:HEAT,DRY,COOLandFAN.Toselecttheautomaticmode,pressandholdthebuttonforatleast3seconds.Ifyoupressthebuttonagain,theunitwillreturntotheFANmode.
LouveranglebuttonTheairflowangleandautomaticlouveroperationcanbesetwiththisbutton.Whenthisbuttonispressed,theanglechangesinthefollowingorder.(Inthecoolinganddryoperationmodes,steps1-5stepsandautomaticswingareavailable).
1Step 2Step 7Step AutoSwing ....
TemperaturebuttonThetemperaturecanbesetusingthisbutton.
Resetbutton(1)PressRESETtoturnoffthefilterindicatorpilotaftercleaningthefilter.(2)Iftheunitunexpectedlystopsworkingduetotheactivationoftheprotectiondevices,etc.,presstheRESETbuttontocancelthecontrolstopafterthecauseoftheabnormalconditionhasbeenresolved.
TimerbuttonsFourbuttonscontrolthetimeroperation.Thetimesettingcanbechangedbypressing“ONTIME”or“OFFTIME”,anditcanbesetagainpressingthe“SET”button.
Tab. 4
Operation1�1PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.4.2. Operation procedure
Whenthecontrolisused,aimthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressthebuttonfortherequiredoperationsmodeasindicatedbelow.
Theoperationordersaresentbypressingthecorrespondingoperationbuttonandpointingtheremotecontrol'stransmitterattheindoorunit'sreceiver.
1. When the orders have been sent, the ‘ ‘ indication on the remote control's LCD screen will flash once.
2. The indicator pilot (yellow) on the indoor unit's receiver area turns on for a second when the indoor unit receives an order.
The“ ”indicator(yellow)Switchesforsomeseconds
ReceiverThetransmissionsign“ ”willflashonce
Remotecontrol
Inanangleof50˚approx.(direction)
Verticallinebetweentransmitterandreceiver
Fig. 8
NOTE
- If the indicator pilot (yellow) does not turn on event though orders have been sent, then the orders have not been received by the indoor unit. In this case, send the orders again.
- The remote control transmitter should be vertical in relation to the receiver; the permitted transmission angle range is within 50º. Nevertheless, the distance for effective transmission is reduced by half when the transmission angle is 50º. It is also reduced if electronic light is used in the room.
- When two indoor units are installed next to each other, they could both receive the orders sent from the remote control. The function for identifying each particular indoor unit cannot be used.
Operation1�2 PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.4.3. Operation with several indoor units
Multipleindoorunits(max.16units)canbestartedandstoppedsimultaneouslywithjustoneremotecontrol.Onlycarrythisoperationoutwhenseveralindoorunitshavebeeninstalledinthesameroom.
NOTE
Do not carry this operation out if the different indoor units are installed in different rooms. Some indoor units may remain unchanged.
I. Remote control installation for several units
$ CAUTION
Disconnect all power supplies before carrying out operations such as wiring, rotary switch setting, etc.
Whenseveralindoorunits(amaximumof16)areoperatingsimultaneouslywithjustoneremotecontrol(wireless),applythereceiverpanelforwirelesscontroltotheunittobeactivated,andapplythestandardpanels(forwiredcontrol)totherestoftheunits.Ifyouneedtouseseveralreceiverpanelsforwirelesscontrol,amaximumof2canbeinstalled.
If2receiverpanelsareused,setthemasprimaryandsecondarypanelsbyfollowingtheproceduresindicatedbelow.
Receiver panel (primary) Standard panel Standard panel
Standard panel with (sub) or without receiver
should be standard unitsRemote control
Fig. 9
NOTE
- It is also possible to combine a remote control and a wireless control with the same group of units.- The RPK units cannot be connected at the same time as the built-in receiver. If you want to use several RPK units
simultaneously with only one remote control, the PC-RLH11 should be used.
Themaximumpermittedcablelengthsbetweenunitsshowninthefollowingtablemustbetakenintoaccount:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 5
Operation1��PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
II. Secondary receiver kit setting for remote controls
• PC-P5H:1.Pressthe( )( )and( )buttonssimultaneouslyfor
atleast3seconds.2.Press( )4timesuntilthemodenumberis“”.3.Pressthebuttontodefinethecorrectnumber,as
shownintheillustration(secondaryorprimary). 0 : Primary
: SecondaryAdjustmentMode No. 5
Fig. 10
Whenthissettingischanged,switchoffthepowersourcetoallindoorunitsafterreturningtooperationmode.
• PC-P1HE:
1.PresstheCHECKandRESETbuttonssimultaneouslyforatleast3secondstoaccesstheoptionalsettingmode.
2.Pressoranddefinetheserviceon0.3.PresstheCHECKbutton.4.Selectthef2codebypressingthe▲ or▼TIME
button.5.Pressthebuttontodefinethecorrectnumber,asshown
intheillustration(secondaryorprimary).
Adjustmen0 : Primary
: Secondary
Fig. 11
III. Secondary receiver kit setting for a wireless remote control
• PC-RLH8/9/11/13:
1.Removethebackcover.2.Setpinno.1ofDIPSW3totheONposition.
Fig. 12
Operation1�� PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
IV. Wiring procedure between indoor units
$ CAUTION
Disconnect all power supplies before carrying out operations such as wiring, rotary switch setting, etc.
1.Laythewiringbetweentheindoorunitsafterreadingthereceiverinstallationmanual.Thetotalcablelengthshouldnotexceed500metres.
References on the cables are indicated below:
PC-RLH8/9/11 PRC-10E1 PRC-15E1 PRC-20E1 PRC-30E1
Cablelength 10m 15m 20m 30m
2.Fixtheconnectioncontrolcablebetweentheindoorunitsatcertainpointswithflexibleflangesensuringthatitdoesnotruninparallelwiththepowersupplycableinsidetheindoorunit.Keepadistanceofmorethan30cmbetweenthecontrolcableandthepowersupplycable.Earthoneendoftheconduitafterinsertingthecontrolcableinsidethemetalconduit.
3.Fittherotaryswitches(RSW)ontheprintedcircuitboardsofeachindoorunit'selectricalboxasshowninthefigureontheright.
4.Checkthenumberofindoorunitsconnectedusingtestmode.
NOTE
The 7-segment display of the receiver and remote control will show the number of indoor units connected when the operation test is carried out with the remote control. However, this number cannot be indicated on some models. In these cases, check the number with the wired control PC-P1HE.
Rotaryswitch
Receiver
Fig. 13
RSW settingUnitNo.1 UnitNo.2 UnitNo.3 UnitNo.4
UnitNo.5 UnitNo.6 UnitNo.7 UnitNo.8
UnitNo.9 UnitNo.10 UnitNo.11 UnitNo.12
UnitNo.13 UnitNo.14 UnitNo.15 UnitNo.16
Tab. 6
Operation1�5PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.5. Test mode with the remote control
NOTE
When several units are operating simultaneously (SET-FREE and UTOPIA series), and a wired control is being used, the test mode can not be carried out using the remote control. In these cases, carry out the test mode with the wired control.
1.Selectthetestmodewhentheinstallationworkiscomplete.a.Installthebatteriesfortheremotecontrol.b.Connectthepowersupplytoindoorandoutdoorunits.c.The‘ ‘pilotlight(yellow)ontheindoorunit'sreceiverwillflash(0.25secondsON⇔0.25secondsOFF)andthen
turnoff.Whenthepilotlightisflashing,theunitwillnotoperatebecauseitisstartingup.
2.Setthetestmodebypressingthe‘SET’buttonandthen‘OFFTIME’.TheLCDshouldappearlikethefigureontheright.
Thetestmodeisinstand-by
3.Settheoperationmodebypressingthe‘MODE’button. Thetestmodeoperating
4.Startthetestmodebypointingthetransmittertowardstheindoorunit'sreceiverandpressingtheRUN/STOPbutton.Whentheindoorunitreceivesorders,the‘ ‘pilot(yellow)ofthereceiverwillbrieflylightup.Checkthattheordersarehavebeencorrectlyreceivedandthattheselectedmode,point3,iscorrectlyset.Intestmode,thereceiver'sredpilot(RUN)isonandthegreenpilot(TIMER)isflashing(0.5secondsON⇔0.5secondsOFF)(*seethenotebelow).ThensetthetimertoOFFfor2hours.
NOTE
1. If the ‘ ‘ pilot (yellow) does not turn on, the receiver may not have received the orders. Send the orders again.2. (*) On the RPK model, the ‘TIMER’ pilot is off.
5.Settheairlouverangleasfollows:Thelouverhasamechanismfortheautomaticswingfunction.Donotmovethelouvermanually.
a.SelecttheFANmodebypressingthe‘MODE’button.b.Setthelouveranglebypressingthe‘LOUVER’button.
6.Endingthetestmode.a.Thetestmodestopsautomaticallyafter2hours.b.Thetestmodecanbeendedbypressingthe‘RUN/STOP’buttonagain.Whentestmodehasended,checkthatthe
redpilot(RUN)andgreenpilot(TIMER)haveturnedoff.
Remote control optional accesories1�� PC - LH�A
PC - LH�A
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
2.5.6. Remote control optional accessories
2.5.6.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5colourbeige(2twistedcables) Ø1.32
(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCBside
Remotecontrolside
A BCable colour Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 7*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
2.5.6.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsofthe
outdoorunitPCBJSTXARP-3connector
Ifalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
(JSTXARP-3)connector
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 8
1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH8
PC - RLH8
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
2.5.7. PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
2.5.7.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.5.7.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 1
1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH8
PC-RLH8
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
2.5.7.3. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - Todos los componentes están en perfecto estado. En caso contrario, contactar con el fabricante.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Receiverkit 1 Withconnectionwire
Connectioncable 3 Withconnectionwire
Flexiblecabletie 1 Forsecuringthecables
Cover 1 Toprotecttheconnectioncable
Tab. 2
2.5.7.4. Installation procedure
Standard wiring
$ CAUTION
Follow these installation procedures carefully. Failure to do so may cause the receiver to become detached from the panel causing a serious accident.
1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.
2.Ifthewirelessreceiverkitisinstalledaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunitandremovetheairpanel.
3.Thisreceiverkitcanbeinstalledinpositions1,2,3or4.
Airpanel
Fig. 1
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH8
PC - RLH8
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
4.Removethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletotheterminalplate(white)asshownbelow.
PCB
Connectioncable
Terminalplate(white) Electricalboxof
theindoorunit
Cabletie“B”
Cabletie“A”Cover
Fig. 2
5.Drawtheconnectioncablethroughthewiringholeontheindoorunitandpassitovertheunit'ssuspensionbrackettothereceiverkitinstallationposition.Secureanyexcesscablewithacabletie.
Connectioncable
Wiringholeoftheindoorunit
Conector
Suspensionbracket
100-
200
mm
Fig. 3
6.Installtheairpanel(optional)ontheindoorunit.
150TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH8
PC-RLH8
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
7.Connectthereceiverkitusingthefollowingprocedure.
a-Routetheconnectioncableoutsidetheboxandconnectittothereceiverkitcable.Onceconnected,covertheconnectorwiththecoverandsecurethecablesusingaflexiblecabletie.
Flexiblecabletie
Cover
Flexiblecabletie
Connectioncable
Receiverkit
Connectioncable
Cornerdivision
Airpanel
Fig. 4
b-Hookthecabletieontotheairpanelringatthebackofthereceiverkit,asshowninthefollowingdiagram.
Ring
Flexiblecabletie
Fig. 5
c-HooktheL-shapedtabonthebackofthereceiverkitintothesquareholeoftheairpanel.
Fig. 6
8.Hooktheotherfixingtabs(3positions)intothesquareholesoftheairpanel.
NOTE
When removing the receiver kit after installing the air panel:- The corner point of the receiver kit can be raised by inserting a coin or flat-head
screwdriver in the area marked and pressing downwards. With raised, turn a coin or flat-head screwdriver under positions and , and the entire receiver kit will lift up.
- After disconnecting the fixing tabs (3 positions), slide the receiver kit in the direction of the arrow and remove it.
Coinorflat-headscrewdriver
Raise
Areamarked
Fig. 7
151TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH8
PC - RLH8
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH8 receiver kit installation
2.5.7.5. Optional functions
$ CAUTION
Switch off all power sources before setting the DIP switches.
Setting the receiver as a secondary receiver, DIP switch (SW3)
Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.
(COOL)Button
Cover
DIPswitch(SW3)
(HEAT)Button
Wiringhole
1.Removethebase.
BoxControlprintedcircuitboards
2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover
Fig. 8
Operational function DIP switch adjustment (SW3)
Secondaryreceiveradjustment.
Tab. 3
152TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH�
PC-RLH�
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH� receiver kit installation
2.5.8 PC-RLH9 receiver kit installation
2.5.8.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Donde haya vapores de aceite y el aceite se disperse. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.5.8.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 1
15�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH�
PC - RLH�
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH� receiver kit installation
2.5.8.3. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Receiverkit
1 Withconnectioncable
Screw 2 Tosecurethereceiverkit
Flexiblecabletie 2 Forsecuringthecables
Tab. 2
2.5.8.4. Installation procedure
Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
Follow these installation procedures carefully. Failure to do so may cause the receiver to become detached from the panel causing a serious accident.
1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.Thecommunicationscablemustbesuppliedbytheinstaller.
2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.Thenremovethegrillefromtheairinlet.
3.Securethewirelessreceiverkittotheairpanelusingthescrews.(Tighteningtorqueshouldbe0.8Nm.) Airpanel (135)
ø7drainconnection
Wirelessreceiverkitcable
Factory-suppliedscrew
Wirelessreceiverkit
Auto-swingmotorcable
Electricalboxoftheindoorunit
Cabletie
(3,5
)
Fig. 1
15�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH�
PC-RLH�
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH� receiver kit installation
4.Runthecableinparallelwiththeautomaticswingmotorcableandattachwiththeflexiblecabletie.
Wirelessreceiverkitcable
Auto-swingmotorcable
Cabletie(factory-supplied)
Fig. 2
5.RemovethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletoterminalsAandBontheterminalplate.
NOTE
After connecting the cable, tie any excess cable using the flexible cable tie supplied by the manufacturer and insert the cables into the electrical control box.
Cabletietrade“B”
Cabletietrade“A”
Controlprintedcircuitboard
Terminalboard
Electricalboxoftheindoorunit
Connectioncable
Fig. 3
6.Removethecoverfromtheremotecontroloftheairinletgrille.Presstheclipsontheremotecontrolcoverbyhand.
Hook
Coverfromtheremotecontrol
Coverfromtheremotecontrol
Airinletgrill
Coverfromtheremotecontrol
Airinletgrill
Hook
Fig. 4
7.Oncetheairpanelissecured,connecttheairinletgrilletotheairpanel.
-Checkthatthesquareholesontheairinletgrillelineupwiththelocationofthewirelessreceiverkitoftheairpanel.
-Makesurethecablefromthewirelessreceiverkitisnotobstructedbythesquareholeoftheairinletgrille.
-Ensurethatthesquareholeoftheairinletgrilledoesnotsnagthewirelessreceiverkitcable.
Airinletgrill
Airpanel
Wirelessreceiverkit
Fig. 5
155TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PC - RLH�
PC - RLH�
Technical catalogue
PC-RLH� receiver kit installation
2.5.8.5. Optional functions
$ CAUTION
Switch off all power sources before setting the DIP switches.
Setting the receiver as a secondary receiver, DIP switch (SW3)
Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.
(COOL)Button
Cover
DIPswitch(SW3)
(HEAT)Button
Cablehole
1.Removethebase.
2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover
BoxControlprintedcircuitboard
Fig. 6
Operationalfunction DIPswitchadjustment(SW3)
Secondaryreceiveradjustment.
Indoorunitidentification
Tab. 3
15� PC - RLH11
PC-RLH11
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
2.5.9. PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
2.5.9.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.5.9.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 1
157PC - RLH11
PC - RLH11
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
2.5.9.3. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2). - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Receiverkit 1 Withconnectioncable
Flexiblecabletie 1 Forsecuringthecables
Screw 4 Tosecurethereceiverkit
Screw 2 Tosecuretheclamp
Clamp 2 Forsecuringthecables
Tab. 2
2.5.9.4. Installation procedure
I. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
Follow these installation procedures carefully. Failure to do so may cause the receiver to become detached from the panel causing a serious accident.
1.Installthewirelessreceiverkitandindoorunitatthesametime.
2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.
3.Makesurethedistancebetweenthewirelessreceiverkitandindoorunitislessthan5metres.
4.Removethecoverusingaflat-headscrewdriver.
Fig. 1
5.Installthewirelessreceiverkitonthewallorceiling,asshownbelow:
158 PC - RLH11
PC-RLH11
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
II. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed
a- Mount the wireless receiver kit fixing bracket with the screws (A) at the � positions.
Screw(A)
Fig. 2
b- Cut one of the pre-drilled holes (*) on the cover.
Fig. 3
c- Run the cable through the groove and pull it out through the pre-drilled hole.
Fig. 4
d- Fit the cover, making sure not to snag the cable.
Cover
ClicksoundFixingbracket
Hook
Fig. 5
15�PC - RLH11
PC - RLH11
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
III. If using an electric control box.
a. There are various types of electrical boxes on the market which can be used for this installation, for example:
- Electrical box for one remote control unit (without cover.) - Electrical box for one remote control unit (with cover) - Output box (with cover)
Also used: - Rigid metal duct (at least Ø20) - Screws (M4) (field supply)
Fig. 6
b- Insert the cable into the rigid metal duct.
Cable
Fig. 7
c- Mount the wireless receiver kit fixing bracket using the screws supplied by the installer. The diagram shows a switch box for 1 remote control.
Cable
Thescrewssuppliedbytheinstaller
Fig. 8
d- Fit the cover as it was before it was removed.
6.RemovethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletoterminalsAandBontheterminalplate.
NOTE
- If using the RPK model, connect the cable to the CN13 connector (3P blue) on the PCB of the indoor unit using the cable with connector (factory-supplied with the RPK).
- After connecting the cable, tie any excess cable using a cable tie (factory-supplied) and insert in the electrical control box.
Fig. 9
1�0 PC - RLH11
PC-RLH11
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH11 receiver kit installation
2.5.9.5. Optional functions
$ CAUTION
Switch off all power sources before setting the DIP switches.
Setting the receiver as a secondary receiver, DIP switch (SW3)
Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.
(COOL)button
Cover
DIPswitch(SW3)
(HEAT)button
Cablehole
1.Removethebase.
2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover
BaseBoxPrintedcircuitboards
Fig. 10
Operationalfunction DIPswitchadjustment(SW3)
Secondaryreceiveradjustment.
Indoorunitidentification
Tab. 3
1�1PC - RLH1�
PC - RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation
2.5.10. PC-RLH13 receiver kit installation
2.5.10.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
2.5.10.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 1
1�2 PC - RLH1�
PC-RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation
2.5.10.3. Supply content
Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- The package contains all the components (see Tab. 2).- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Receiverkit 1 With connection cable
Connectioncable 1
Flexiblecabletie 2 For securing the cables
Cover 1 For securing the cables
Tab. 2
2.5.10.4. Installation procedure
Standard wiring
$ CAUTION
Follow these installation procedures carefully. Failure to do so may cause the receiver to become detached from the panel causing a serious accident.
1��PC - RLH1�
PC - RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation
1.Installthewirelessreceiverkit,indoorunitandairpanelatthesametime.
2.Ifinstallingthewirelessreceiverkitaftertheindoorunit,unplugthepowersourcefromtheindoorunit.Thenremovethegrillefromtheairinlet.
3.Thisreceiverkitcanonlybeinstalledinoneposition.
Cablehole
Installationposition
Electricalbox
Fig. 1
4.Removethecoverfromtheelectricalboxoftheindoorunitandconnectthecabletotheterminalblock(white),asshownbelow.
Connectioncable
Terminalboard
Electricalboxoftheindoorunit
PCB
Cabletietrade“A” Cabletietrade“B”
Fig. 2
5.Drawtheconnectioncablethroughthewiringholeoftheindoorunitandrunitacrosstothereceiverkitinstallationposition.
6.Installtheairpanel(optional)ontheindoorunit.
7.Connectthereceiverkitusingthefollowingprocedure:
1�� PC - RLH1�
PC-RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation
a-Passthecablethroughthecornerholeandconnecttheconnectioncableandreceiverkitwire.Oncethecableisconnected,covertheconnectorwiththecoverandsecureitusingacabletie.
Airpanel
Corneraccess
Connectioncable
Connectioncable
Cover
Cabletie
Receiverkit
Cabletie
Fig. 3
b-Hookthetabonthebackofthereceiverkittothepinoftheairpanel,asshownbelow.
Pin
Cabletie
Fig. 4
c-HooktheL-shapedtabonthebackofthereceiverkitintothesquareholeontheairpanelandsecureitwithascrew.
Screw
Tabs(2positions)
L-shapedtab
Fig. 5
8.Hooktheotherfixingtabs(3positions)intothesquareholesoftheairpanel.
$ CAUTION
To remove the receiver kit after mounting the air panel:- Remove the screws (4 positions) from the front of the air panel.- Move the receiver kit by hand in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove the tabs
(2 positions) from the corner cover, then slide the receiver in the direction indicated by the arrow .
Fig. 6
1�5PC - RLH1�
PC - RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008 PC-RLH1� receiver kit installation
2.5.10.5. Optional functions
$ CAUTION
Switch off all power sources before setting the DIP switches.
Setting the receiver as a secondary receiver, DIP switch (SW3)
Openthecoverbyremovingthetwoscrewsinordertoaccessthefollowingfunctions.Forthisoptionalfunction,activatethepinmarked.
(COOL)Button
1.Removethebase
2.Removetwoscrewsandopenthecover(HEAT)button DIPswitch
(SW3)
Fig. 7
Operationalfunction DIPswitchadjustment(SW3)
Secondaryreceiveradjustment.
Indoorunitidentification
Tab. 3
1�� PC - RLH1�
PC-RLH1�
Technical catalogue
TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Table of contents
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3. CENTRALREMOTECONTROLS..........................................................169
3.1. PSC-5S...................................................................................................169
3.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................169
3.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................1693.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................170
3.1.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................170
3.1.3. Installation..............................................................................................171
3.1.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1713.1.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1723.1.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1723.1.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1723.1.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1733.1.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................174
3.1.4. Operation................................................................................................179
3.1.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................1793.1.4.2.OperationModeSelectionProcedure................................................................180
3.1.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................183
3.1.5.1.Inputandoutputfunctions..................................................................................1833.1.5.2.Controlinternalfunctions....................................................................................187
3.1.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................188
3.1.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................1883.1.6.2.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................189
3.1.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................191
3.1.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................1913.1.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................191
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
General details
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3. CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLS
3.1. PSC-5S
3.1.1. General details
3.1.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features:
- 1� indoor unit groups can be connected, with 1 main remote control connected to a H-LINK on each group that can control up to a maximum of 128 indoor units.
- UP to 8 central remote controls (PSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.
- In addition to the basic functions, operation mode and temperature setting, the air flow and automatic louver can also be adjusted.
- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the error.
- Also includes the option of receiving and sending external signals, along with the option to connect with the PSC-5T timer.
- The external signals control the following functions: -Simultaneousoperation/stopofalltheunits. -Simultaneousemergencystopofalltheunits. -Operationsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits. -Alarmsignalforsomeofthecontrolledunits.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote can be used with another of the same type or another compatible model, bearing in mind that when using two remotes, one will act as a master and the other as a slave.Remote controls with which the PSC-5S central control is compatible:
Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9PC-P5H PC-RLH8
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
Thisremotecontrolis100%compatiblewiththefollowingindoorunits:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407CRCI-FSGE RPC-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E
RPI-FSGE RPF-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E
RPI-FSGE1 RPFI-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R
RPC-FSGE RPK-FSG2M RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E
RPF-FSG RCD-FSG(1/2) RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPFI-FSG RCI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSNM RPFI-G7E
RPK-FSGM RPI-FSG2Ei RCD-FSN RPK-G7M
RCD-FSG RPC-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RCI-FSG2E RPF-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M
RPI-FSG2E RPFI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M
RPIM-FSNE
RCIM-FSNE
Tab. 2
General Details and General Dimensions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
170TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.1.2. Maintenance advantages
The central station can be used together with each unit's individual remote control.
This provides the user with a centralised control of all information sent from all units, located for example in a maintenance room or central control office, allowing direct and instant access to information on each of the units as well as warnings and alerts on any faults that may occur.There are �5 alarm codes for identifying and easily locating any fault or problem in the unit.The alarms are classified into groups to facilitate maintenance procedures. (For more details, see PC-P1HE)
3.1.2. Dimension Details
53
83.5
120
120
15
20
RMT.SWNAVL
FILTERABNML
CHECK
EMERGENCYDEMANDTIMERGROUP
910111213141516
12345678
HIGH
MED
LOW LOUVER
NOFUNCTION
˚CTEMP.SET
COOL
AUTO
HEATDRY
FAN
AUTO
GROUPRUN/STOP
Fig. 1
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
171TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.3. Installation
3.1.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices are activated too frequently or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the mains
and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of an incident of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact your
HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
172TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 3
3.1.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
Atleast50mm
Fig. 2
3.1.3.4. Supply content
NOTE
Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts:
Name Quant. Comments
Centralremotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation.
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Tab. 4
NOTE
Bear in mind that the central remote control is divided into two parts:- Central remote control- Power source
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.3.5. Installation procedure
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section as indicated in Fig. 3.
Screwdriver
BracketGroove
Centralcontrol
Hendiduras
SoporteDestornilladorScrewdriver Bracket
Groove
Bracket
Groove
Fig. 3
2. Connect the power supply part to the control box, as shown below.
NOTE
Do not lay the cables from the power source and the control unit in the same duct, since the power cable is liable to cause interference with the control cable.
Controlcable
Screws
Powersupplypart
Powersupplywire
Controlbox
Fig. 4
3. Connect the control unit part to the power supply part. Join them at the top first, then at the bottom.
Fig. 5
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.3.6. Electrical connection
I. Electrical wiring connection
Up to 8 central controls can be connected to the H-LINK system.
Toconnecttoterminalblock1and2oftheindoorunitandtheoutdoorunit
Outdoorunits
Indoorunits
Shieldedtwistedpaircable(1p-0,75mm2)orTwistedpaircable
Powersource(220Vcaor240Vca)
H-LINK
Fig. 6
Electrical connection of the PSC-5S central control to the PSC-5T timer.
NOTE
- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one PSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different
remote control. The timer can then be connected to the other remote.
PSC-5T PSC-5STB2Connector
Outdoorunit
Indoorunits
Controls
Accessorycable(1m)
Toothercentralstations
Cabledepartrenzado1P-0,75mm2
(máx.100m)
Powersource220Vcaor240VCN1
AvailablefortheH-Linkconnection(toconnecttoterminalblock1and2oftheindoorunitandtheoutdoorunit)
Fig. 7
II. DIP switch adjustment
If connecting more than one central control (up to a maximum of 8) to the H-LINK system, first set the address using the DIP switch DSW1, as shown below:
NOTE
The DIP switches are all deactivated before they are sent from the factory.
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
175TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
■ Address setting with DSW1 Dip Switch
The DSW1 is located on the PCB on the inside of the control unit, as shown in the following diagram:
DSW2
DSW1
PSC-5S
Fig. 8
Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Address6 Address7 Address8
Tab. 5
Splitthecentralcontrolpowersupplylinefromthemainpowersupplylineusingajunctionbox,asshowninthefollowingdiagram:
220Vcaor240Vca
Junctionbox
Totheoutdoorunitordisjunctor
Centralremotecontrol Indoorunit
Fig. 9
$ CAUTION
- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to
malfunction.
III. Automatic group configuration
WhenswitchingonthePSC-5Scentralcontrolunitforthefirsttime,itwillautomaticallyconnecttotheindoor/outdoorunitH-Linknetworkandsearchforalltheunitstowhichitisconnected.
ThecentralcontrolLCDscreenwillshowthefollowing:
Refrigerantcycleinconnectionchecking Numberofcheckedindoorunitsconnectedtotherefrigerantcycle
$ CAUTION
- Automatic configuration can last for several minutes since the PSC-5S central control will check each and every unit connected (up to 256).
- If the process stops or becomes inactive for more than 5 minutes, this means there is some kind of communication problem on the H-Link network (unit alarm triggered, incorrect H-Link wiring or incorrect termination resistance configuration).
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
Inordertoidentifythemasterunitforeachgroup,thePSC-5Swillcarryoutthefollowingsteps: -Forgroup1,itwillsearchallindoorunitswiththeaddress"0"andwillsettheunitwiththelowestrefrigerantaddress
asthemaster. -Itwillthenrepeatthefirststepforallthegroups(upto16).
Ifthefirstconfigurationcheckonallunitsshowsthattheyhavedifferentaddressesandareallcontrolledbyseparateremotecontrols,thegroupscreatedcanbeconsideredcorrect,andtheLCDscreenonthePSC-5Scentralcontrolunitwillappearasshowninthediagram.
Otherwise,itwillsimplyread"AA"andthegroupsmustbeconfiguredasshownonthenextfewpages.
$ CAUTION
- If the PSC-5S is not connected to the H-Link or the units connected to the H-Link are not powered, the PSC-5S will not locate all the units and will not perform this check, since it does not have any outgoing power.
- To force the unit to perform the check again, erase the EEPROM as indicated in the Maintenance and Repair section.
IV. Group configuration
Thecentralcontrolunitisdesignedtocontrolupto16groupsofupto16units(themaximumnumberofindoorunitsisdefinedbytheH-Linklimit:128).
Eachofthesegroupsismadeupoftwotypesofunit: • MasterUnit:Unitselectedineachgrouptocontrolandseteachofthegroupparametersequallyandatthesame
time.
• SlaveUnit:Units(upto15inonegroup)whichfollowthemasterunitconfigurationassignedforthisgroup.
Tousethecentralcontrolunitcorrectly,eachgroupofunitsmustbeconfiguredasindicatedbelow:
$ CAUTION
- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to
malfunction.
Examplesofgroups
IUIU
PC-P1HEPC-P1HE
IU IU IU
PC-2HTE
Master Slave
1group 1group 1group 1group
Fig. 10
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
177TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
V. Setting the master unit
• Press and hold the "CHECK" button for 3 seconds and the LCD screen will display the following:
“1”indicatesthemasterunitsettingmode. Numberoftheoutdoorunittobeset.(PressCHECKagaintoseemoreoptions). Whenthe"SET"indicationappears,theindoorunitshownontheLCDscreenissetasthe
master.(If"SET"doesnotappear,theunitisnotsetasthemaster). Addressoftheindoorunittobeset.(Tochangethedirection,press“TEMP”).¥ Whenthe"CHECK"indicationappears,thecentralcontrolunitissettocheckmode.¦ Statusofmasterunitforeachgroup:
if{ison:themasterunitisset.if{isoff:themasterunitisnotset.
§ Numberofthegroupbeingset.
• Selecting the group to be set.Eachtimethe"GROUP"buttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillskiptothenextnumberitreachesthegrouptobeset.
• Setting the indoor unitTochangethenumberoftheoutdoorunitpress“TEMP”.Tochangetheaddressoftheindoorunitpress“TEMP”andselecttheunitthatneedstobeset.Theindicationwillchangeintheordershownbelow:
$ CAUTION
- When the number indicator for both the outdoor unit and indoor unit reads “--”, the address of the indoor unit cannot be changed, even by pressing “TEMP” .
- The following units are not shown: The number of an outdoor unit which has no indoor unit connected to it. The address of the indoor units that are not connected.- The indoor unit which has already been set as the master unit will not be indicated.
• Activating the master unit.Afterselectingtheindoorunitfromtheaforementionedrefrigerantcircuit,press“RUN/STOP”.Theunitshownwillbesetasthemasterunitandtheindicators“{”and“SET”willappear.
NOTE
Each time the "RUN/STOP" button is pressed, the selected unit will be set as the master unit or the setting will be removed.
$ CAUTION
- Only one indoor unit may be set as the master unit in each group. To set the current master unit as the master unit for another group, cancel the current master unit setting and set it to the other group.
- If there are two indoor units with and without automatic louver in the same group, set the unit equipped with louver as the master unit. If the indoor unit without an automatic louver is set as the master unit, the louver setting will not be available for all other units in the group.
• Returning to normal status.Press"RESET"toreturntonormalstatus.
Installation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
178TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
VI. Setting the slave unit
• Press and hold the "CHECK" button for 3 seconds and the LCD screen will display the following:
Thescreenwillshowthemasterunitsetting.
• Press "CHECK" to switch to the slave unit setting.ExplanationoftheLCDscreeninslaveunitsetting: “2”indicatestheslaveunitsettingmode. Numberoftheoutdoorunittobeset.(Tochangethenumber,press“TEMP”). Whenthe"SET"indicationappears,theindoorunitshownontheLCDscreenissetasthe
slave.(If"SET"doesnotappear,theslaveunitisnotset). Addressoftheindoorunittobeset.(Tochangethedirection,press“TEMP”).¥ WhentheCHECKindicationappears,thecentralcontrolunitissettocheckmode.¦ Statusofslaveunitforeachgroup:
if{ison:theslaveunitisset.if{isoff:theslaveunitisnotset.
§ Numberofthegroupbeingset.
• Selecting the group to be set.Eachtimethe"GROUP"buttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillskiptothenextnumberitreachesthegrouptobeset.
• Setting the indoor unitTochangethenumberoftheoutdoorunitpress“TEMP”.Tochangetheaddressoftheindoorunitpress“TEMP”andselecttheunitthatneedstobeset.Theindicationwillchangeintheordershownbelow:
$ CAUTION
- When the number indicator for both the outdoor unit and indoor unit reads “--”, the address cannot be changed, even by pressing “TEMP” .
- The following elements are not shown: The number of an outdoor unit which has no indoor unit connected to it. The address of the indoor units that are not connected.- The indoor unit which has already been set as the master unit or the slave unit will not be indicated.
• Activating the slave unit.Afterselectingtheindoorunit,press“RUN/STOP”.Theunitshownwillbesetastheslaveunitandtheindicators“{”and“SET”willappear.
NOTE
Each time the "RUN/STOP" button is pressed, the selected unit will be set as the slave unit or the setting will be removed.
$ CAUTION
- Up to 15 slave units can be configured in one group. (The maximum number of units is 16 per group, including the master unit).
- To change the slave unit setting to another group, cancel the current slave unit setting and set it up for the other group.
- If all the units are set as masters, the central control unit will not be able to switch to the slave unit setting mode.
• Returning to normal status.Press"RESET"toreturntonormalstatus.
Operation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
17�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.4. Operation
3.1.4.1. Description
FanspeedindicatorIndicatesthefanspeedselectedforeachgroupindicated:“HIGH”,“MED”,“LOW”.
ModeindicationIndicatestheoperationmodeselectedfortheindicatedgroup:“Fan”,“Cool”,“Heat”and“Dry”.
NOTE
The automatic mode is available if the AUTO function is on.
Runindicator(redpilotlight)
"RUN/STOP"button
"MODE"button
“FANSPEED”button Fig. 11 Model: PSC-5S
"ON/OFFTIMER"button(starts/stopstimer).Usedtoswitchthetimeron/off;whenthisbuttonispressed,thetimerscheduleofthecontrolunit(PSC-5T)willbecomeavailableandthe"TIMER"indicationwillappear.
“RMT.SWAVL/NAVL”buttonUsedtoeitherblockoracceptthecontrolunitthrougheachremotecontrol.When“RMT.SWNAVL”appears,useoftheremotecontrolisblocked.
NOTE
When monitor mode is selected, the aforementioned operation modes will be indicated along with the temperature setting.
"LOUVER"button
"TEMP"button(temperaturesetting)
Buttonwithnoassignedfunction
“CHECK”buttonUsedtosettheunitasmasterorslave
“RESET”buttonUsedtocancelthe“CHECK”and“FILTER”functions.
GroupselectionbuttonUsedtochangethenumberofthegroupofinteriorunitstobemonitored(01to16).Press“AA”tomonitorallunitssimultaneously.
Indicators:“CHECK”,“FILTER”,“RMT.SWNAVL”and“ABNML”(alarm)
Temperatureindicator
“TIMER”,“DEMAND”,“EMERGENCY”and“NOFUNCTION”indication. “TIMER”appearswhenthetimerisconnected.“DEMAND”appearswhenthe"DEMAND"function(ThermostatStoppage)isselected. “EMERGENCY”appearswhentheoutdoorinputfunctionsendsouttheemergencystopsignal.“NOFUNCTION”whenthebuttonpressedisnotavailable.
Thesymbolindicatestheoperatingconditionofeachgroup.Offindicatesastoppage,onindicatesrunning,andflashingindicatesanabnormalcondition.
Groupnumberindication
Modelnumbercheckingindication
Swinglouverindication
Tab. 6
Operation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
180TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.4.2. Operation Mode Selection Procedure
I. Group selection and unit operation status check
• Supplying power to the unit.
$ CAUTION
- The unit should be powered for at least 12 hours before starting it up to protect the compressor.- Do not interrupt the electrical current while the air conditioning system is in use.
• Press the “GROUP” button.Pressing"GROUP"repeatedlychangesthenumberofthegrouptobecheckedintheorderindicatedbelow.Inthecaseof"AA",allunitsarecontrolledsimultaneously.
• When the group is selected, the group settings are displayed. Ifusingtheremotecontrol,thesettingcontentwillbeindicated.1■~16■showstheoperatingstatusforeachgroup,asfollows:- “OFF”(■):stopped- On():runningFlashing(■):abnormalcondition
Therunindicator(redpilotlight)indicatesthefollowing:- Off:allgroupsareswitchedoff- On:1groupormoreisrunning- Flashing:thereisanabnormalconditionon1ormoregroups
FortheAAgroup,theindications(operationmode,temperaturesetting,airflow,louverangleand"RMT.SWNAVL")willonlyappearifallthegroupshavethesamesetting.
II. Changing operation mode
COOL:CoolsthetemperatureoftheroomthroughthedistributionofcoldairHEAT:HeatsthetemperatureoftheroomthroughthedistributionofhotairDRY:DehumidifiestheroommorethaninnormalcoolingmodeFAN:Circulatestheairintheroom
• Press the "GROUP" button to select the group.Inthediagramontheright,group4isselected.
• Press the “MODE” button.Bypressing“MODE”,theindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:
FAN COOL HEAT DRY
NOTE
Shown below is the operation mode setting for group 4. The same setting procedure should be followed for the other groups. If using the same setting for all groups, select group number AA.
Operation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
181TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
III. Setting the temperature, fan speed and louver angle
• Press the GROUP button and select the group to set.
• Setting the temperature.Setthetemperaturebypressingthe“TEMP”button.Pressingincreasesthetemperatureby1°C(maximum:30°C).Pressingreducesthetemperatureby1°C(minimum:19°CforCool,DryandFanmodes;minimum17°CforHeatmode).Ifispressedfor3secondswiththetemperaturesetto30°Cortotheminimum,thetemperaturewillnotchangeandthetemperatureindicationwillappearas“--”.Inthiscase,pressor,andthetemperaturesettingindicationwillreturntotheminimumtemperatureorto30°C.Inthediagramontheright,thetemperatureissetto22°C.
• Setting the fan speed.Bypressing“FANSPEED”,theindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:
HIGH MED LOW
In the diagram on the right, the speed is set to HIGH.
NOTE
In dehumidifying mode, the fan speed changes automatically and remains fixed on "LOW". In this case, the fan speed cannot be changed (the indication will remain on the setting status).
• Setting the louver angle.Bypressing“AUTOLOUVER”,thelouverangleindicationwillchangeinthefollowingorder:Setthebuttontothe“ “position;theindicationwillchangeto“ “toindicatethatthesystemhasbeensettoautomaticswingmode.Pressthebuttonagainandtheindicationwillchangeto“ “.Thediagramontherightshowstheautomaticswingmodesetting.
NOTE
- There is a phase shift between the louver position indicated on the LCD screen and the actual angle of the louver during operation. Therefore, when adjusting the louver, set the angle according to the angle indicated on the LCD screen.
- When "AUTO LOUVER" is pressed, the louver may not stop immediately.
$ CAUTION
The louver angle changes automatically in heating mode to control the unit.
IV. Running/stopping the units
• Press the GROUP button and select the group to set.
• Press the RUN/STOP button.Dependingonthestatusofthemachinesinthegroup,theywillswitcheitheronoroffwhenthebuttonispressed.BypressingthebuttonontheAAgroup,allmachinesinallgroupswilleitherswitchonoroff.
Operation
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
182TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
V. Block remote control operation
Thisfunctionblockstheuseoftheremotecontrolforcontrollingindoorunits.Whenthisisactivated,thescreenwilldisplayCENTRAL.
• Press the GROUP button and select the group to set.
• Press the “RMT.SW NAVL” button.Pressing"RMT.SWNAVL”switchestheremotecontrolfunctioneitheronoroff,andthescreenwillshow“RMT.SWNAVL”forthegroupselected.
VI. Timer operation
Switchesthetimerfunction(PSC-5T)eitheronoroff.Thetimercanbesetindividuallytoeachgroup,howevertheschedulewillbethesameforallunitsinthegroupsforwhichitisset.
• Press the GROUP button and select the group to set.
• Press the “TIMER” button.Pressing"TIMER"activatesthetimerinthegrouptobeset.The“TIMER”indicationappearsontheLCD.
VII. LCD screen indications
The“EMERGENCY”indicationappearswhenanemergencystopsignalisreceivedthroughtheoutdoorinput.Duringemergencystoppage,theindoorunitswillstopandtheremotecontrolfunctionwillbecomeunavailable.
“DEMAND”isshownwhenthe"DEMAND"function(ThermostatStoppage)isselected.Shownonlyintheselectedgroupsandwhenthedemandsignalisreceivedthroughtheoutdoorinput,the"DEMAND"indicationwillflash.
The"FILTER"indicationappearswhentheindoorunitairfilterisclogged.Cleanit.Aftercleaningit,press"RESET"toturnoffthe"FILTER"indication.
Operation and Optional functions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
VIII. Indications in abnormal conditions
Whendetectinganalarm,therunpilotlight(red)willflash.ThealarmwillbeindicatedontheLCDscreen.“{”willflashtoindicatethegroupforwhichthealarmwastriggered.PresstheGROUPbuttonandselectthegroupfromwhichthealarmwastriggered;theunitnumber,modelnumber,alarmcodeandthenormalindicationwillthenappearon-screenrepeatedly.
NOTE
Depending on the unit model, the model number may not be displayed.If there is an abnormal condition on several units, the indications will be shown alternately.
N. of ref.Dir. of U.I.
ModelcodeAlarmcode
Ifallindicationsdisappear,thismaybeduetoapowerfailureorelectricalnoise.Ifthefaultisduetoapowerfailure,theunitwillnotrestartautomatically;youwillneedtoperformthestart-upprocedureagain.Iftheelectricalsupplyisrestoredwithin2secondsorless,theunitwillrestartautomatically.Ifthefaultisduetoelectricalnoise,theunitmaybestoppedbytheelectricalnoiseprotectiondevice.Afterresolvingtheproblem,gothroughthestart-upprocedureagain.Alarm61,whichonlyappearsforthePSC-5Sunit,meansaunitregisteredinagroupcannotbelocated.TheproblemmaybedueafaultontheunitorontheH-Linkconnection.
Model number
Indication Model
H Heatpump
P Inverter
F Multiple
C Coolingonly
E Other
3.1.5. Optional functions
3.1.5.1. Input and output functions
The central station has two input functions and two output functions, as shown below.
Input setting mode, output setting mode and connector.
Mode Port
DSW2 setting
Input1 CN21-2Levelsignalfor
simultaneousstart/stop
Simultaneousoperation,
pulsesignal
Input2 CN22-3
“DEMAND“function
(ThermostatStoppage)
Emergencystop
Simultaneousstop,pulse
signal
Output1 CN31-2 Simultaneousoperationoutput
Output2 CN31-3 Simultaneousalarmoutput
Tab. 7
NOTE
The DIP switches are all deactivated before they are sent from the factory.
Location of DSW2
DSW2
DSW1
PSC-5S
Fig. 12
• Required component specifications:- ConnectiontoCN2orCN3,12Vdc,novoltage- Relé“OMRONMY”- PCC-1A3-pinconnectorcord
Optional functions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
1. Level signal for simultaneous start/stop
Thisisaremoteon/offfunctionwhichusesthelevelsignal(ON/OFF).Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.
.
Fig. 13
Timechart
Time
Signto1and2ofCN2
Controlwiththeremotecontrol
Unitoperation
Fig. 14
Thisisaremoteon/offfunctionwhichusesthepulsesignalThebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.
Fig. 15
Timechart
Signto1and2ofCN2
Signto2and3ofCN2
Controlwiththeremotecontrol
Unitoperation
Time
Fig. 16
Optional functions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
185TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3. Emergency stop
Thisisaremoteemergencystopfunctionwhichusesthepulsesignal.Thisstopsallunitscontrolledbythecentralstation.Nofurthersettingscanbemadeusingtheremotecontroluntiltheemergencystopfunctionisswitchedoff.
Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.
.
Fig. 17
Timechart
Signto2and3ofCN2
Controlwiththeremotecontrol
Unitoperation
Time
Fig. 18
4. “DEMAND“ function (Thermostat Stoppage)
Thisisaremotethermostatsignalfortheselectedunits.OnlythoseunitsshowingtheDEMANDindicationwillfollowthisorder.Seethe"Thermostatstoppagesettingprocedure"section.
Thebasicwiringandatimechartareshownbelow.
.
Fig. 19
Timechart
Signto2and3ofCN2
Controlwiththecentralstation
UnitoperationThermostaton
Time
Fig. 20
Optional functions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
I. Thermostat stoppage setting procedure
• Changing to check modePressthe“CHECK”buttonforatleast3secondstochangethecentralstationcheckmode.
• Changing to thermostat stoppage setting modePressandholdthe"CHECK"buttonuntiltheseven-segmentdisplayshows"5"(thermostatstoppagesettingmode),toperformthecheck.TheLCDscreenwillshowthefollowing:
“5”Indicatesthermostatstoppagesettingmode. Numberoftherefrigerantcycleontheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobe
set. Addressoftheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobeset. When"CHECK"appears,thecentralstationisincheckmode.¥ Thegroupwiththermostatstoppagecontrolalreadysetbedisplayed.
(“{”on:optionset;“{”off:optionnotset).¦ Onlythegroupforwhichthemasterunitisalreadysetwillbedisplayed.Thegroupthatstill
needstobesetwillflash.
• Selecting the group to be set.Selectthegrouptosetusingthe"GROUP"button;eachtimethebuttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillmove.
Pressthe"RUN/STOP"buttontosettheselectedgroupwiththermostatstoppagecontrol.Theindicators“{”and“DEMAND”willappear,indicatingthatthesettingisapplied
5. Simultaneous operation outputThisfunctionisusedtochecktheoperationalstatusoftheunitscheckedbythecentralstation.Ifanyoftheunitsareon,thesimultaneousmodeoutputwillbeactivated.Thebasicwiringisshownbelow.
.
Fig. 21
6. Simultaneous alarm output
Thisfunctionisusedtocheckthealarmstatusoftheunitscheckedbythecentralstation.Ifanyoftheunitsareindicatinganalarmstatus,thisoutputwillbeactive.Thebasicwiringisshownbelow.
.
Fig. 22
Optional functions
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
187TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.5.2. Control internal functions
• Switching to option setting mode.
Pressandholdthe"CHECK"buttonfor3seconds.Duringthistime,allgroupswillswitchoff.Thecentralcontrolswitchestooptionsettingmode.The"CHECK"indicationwillthenappear,and"1"(masterunitsettingmode)willbeshownonthe7-segmentdisplayforthecheck.
$ CAUTION
If a group is running, the central control cannot be changed to check mode.
• Selecting the function to be set.
Pressthe"CHECK"buttonuntilthefunctiontobesetappearsonthe7-segmentdisplay.7
segment disp.
Function
ALocking
operationmode
Lockingthetemperature
setting
cLockingcooling
only
dLockingtheair
flow
E
Automaticcooling/heating
mode
“A”indicatestheoptionsettingmode. Numberoftherefrigerantcycleontheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobe
set. When"SET"appears,theindoorunitissetwiththeoptionalfunction. Addressoftheindoorunitsetasthemasterunitforthegrouptobeset.¥ When"CHECK"appears,thecentralcontrolisincheckmode..¦ Optionsettingstatusforeachgroup:
(“{”on:optionset;“{”off:optionnotset).§ Numberofthatyouneedtoset.
• Selecting the group to be set.Selectthegrouptosetusingthe"GROUP"button;eachtimethebuttonispressed,theflashinggroupnumberindicatorwillmove.
Pressthe"RUN/STOP"buttontosetthefunctionfortheselectedgroup.Theindicators“{”and“SET”willappear,indicatingthatthesettingisapplied
$ CAUTION
- If the optional functions are set using the central control, they will need to be set for the group controlled by the remote control.- If the optional functions (elements A-E shown above) are set using the remote control, they will need to be set for the group controlled
by the central control.
Maintenance and repair
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
188TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.6. Maintenance and repair
3.1.6.1. Controller reboot procedure
Step No. Action required
1
Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.
“GROUP” “MODE”
5 NOTE
If a group is running, the NO FUNCTION indication will appear and the central station will not change to self-check mode.
3
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,inself-checkmode.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
â AUTO AUTO
For1second
2
âFor1second
3
âFor1second
4
âFor1second
5
âFor1second
(Allindicationsoff)
6
â AUTO AUTO
For3seconds(Allindicationson)
Todelete"EEPROM"memoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.
“GROUP” “MODE” 5
Goto5
4 Ifthecombinationisnotentered,thetestwillbecompleteandthescreenwillgoblank,itcanthenbeusedagain.
5
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,instart-upmode.
No. LCDindication Action
1
âAfterpressingthethree
buttons
2
âPress“RESET”
3
âThe“EEPROM”iserased
and0
4
âThesystemwillstartup
NOTE
In this condition:Press “CHECK” if start-up is not required, and the system will return to operation mode.
Maintenance and repair
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
18�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.6.2. Self-check mode
$ CAUTION
Switch off all the groups of units.
Step No. Action required
1
Self-checkmodewillstart,andthefollowingsequenceofimageswillappearonscreenPressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.
UNITSELECTION
MODE
5 NOTE
If a group is running, the NO FUNCTION indication will appear and the central station will not change to self-check mode.
3
LCD(liquidcrystaldisplay)check:thisiscarriedoutautomatically.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
â AUTO AUTO
For1second
2
âFor1second
3
âFor1second
4
âFor1second
5
âFor1second
(Allindicationsoff)
6
â AUTO AUTO
For3seconds(Allindicationson)
4• RUN pilot light check. TheRUNpilotlightwillflashtwice.
5• Button input and DSW check. PressallthebuttonsandsettheDSWtoONorOFFalternately,checkingthatthenumber"29"isindicatedasthenormalinputnumber.
6• Transmission circuit check. Thischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.
7
• External output check. Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN3.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -SwitchonLED1for2seconds -SwitchonLED2for2seconds -SwitchoffLED1andLED2for2seconds -SwitchonLED1andLED2 (TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).
Maintenance and repair
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
8
• External input check.Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN2.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -Whenbutton1issettoON,LED1willbeON -Whenbutton1issettoOFFandbutton2issettoON,LED2willbeON -Whenbuttons1and2aresettoON,LED1andLED2willbeON -(TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).
9• EEPROM check(Consult4.2.6.1.Controllerrebootprocedure)
10• IC check for the control timerThischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.
LED1
LED2
CN3
1
2
3
Resistance
CN2
1
2
3
Button2
Button1
Fig. 23
Remote control optional accessories
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
3.1.7. Remote control optional accessories
3.1.7.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmbeigecolour
(twistedandshielded2cable) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)Indoorunit
PCBsideRemotecontrol
side
A BCable colour Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 8*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
3.1.7.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 9
PSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5S
Table of contents
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.2. CSC-5S..................................................................................................195
3.2.1. Generaldetails......................................................................................195
3.2.2. Dimensiondetails...................................................................................196
3.2.3. Installation..............................................................................................196
3.2.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................1963.2.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................1973.2.3.3.Spacenecessaryfortheinstallation...................................................................1973.2.3.4.Supplycontent....................................................................................................1973.2.3.5.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................1983.2.3.6.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................199
3.2.4 Operation................................................................................................202
3.2.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2023.2.4.2.Remotecontrols.................................................................................................2033.2.4.3.Operationprocedure...........................................................................................203
3.2.5. Optionalfunctions...................................................................................207
3.2.6. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................208
3.2.6.1.Chillerunitcheckingprocedure..........................................................................2083.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure................................................................................2103.2.6.3.Self-checkmode.................................................................................................211
3.2.7. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................213
3.2.7.1.Remotecontrolcable(PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1).................................................2133.2.7.2.3-pinconnectorcord...........................................................................................213
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
General details
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2. CSC-5S
3.2.1. General details
Selection advantages
I. General features:
- 8 chiller and 8 CSC-5S central remote control addresses can be connected on each H-LINK
- Up to 8 central remote controls (CSC-5S) can be connected to a H-LINK.
- Basic functions, heat/cold mode and temperature setting.
- When a problem occurs, an alarm code will immediately be displayed with detailed information about the error.
- A standard external input terminal is included for possible connection to a timer.
- The external signals control the following functions: -Start/Stop. -Operationmode(Cooling/Heating). -Temperaturesetting(Cold/Heat).
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote control can be connected to the following water chiller units:
Series-G2 Series-G1 Series-GRCUE-40AG2 RHUE-40AG2 RCUE-40WG2 RCUE-40AG1 RCUE-40AG RHUE-40AG RCUE-40WG RCUE-40CLG
RCUE-50AG2 RHUE-50AG2 RCUE-50WG2 RCUE-50AG1 RCUE-50AG RHUE-50AG RCUE-50WG RCUE-50CLG
RCUE-60AG2 RHUE-60AG2 RCUE-60WG2 RCUE-60AG1 RCUE-60AG RHUE-60AG RCUE-60WG RCUE-60CLG
RCUE-70AG2 RHUE-70AG2
RCUE-80AG2 RHUE-80AG2 RCUE-80WG2 RCUE-80AG1 RCUE-80AG RHUE-80AG RCUE-80WG RCUE-80CLG
RCUE-100AG2 RHUE-100AG2 RCUE-100WG2 RCUE-100AG1 RCUE-100AG RHUE-100AG RCUE-100WG RCUE-100CLG
RCUE-120AG2 RHUE-120AG2 RCUE-120WG2 RCUE-120AG1 RCUE-120AG RHUE-120AG RCUE-120WG RCUE-120CLG
RCUE-140AG2 RHUE-140AG2 RCUE-140AG1 RCUE-140AG
RCUE-150WG2 RCUE-150AG1 RCUE-150AG RCUE-150WG
RCUE-160AG2 RHUE-160AG2
RCUE-180AG2 RHUE-180AG2 RCUE-180WG2 RCUE-180AG1 RCUE-180AG RCUE-180WG
RCUE-210AG2 RHUE-210AG2 RCUE-200WG2 RCUE-200AG1 RCUE-200AG RCUE-200WG
RCUE-240AG2 RHUE-240AG2 RCUE-240WG2 RCUE-240AG1 RCUE-240AG RCUE-240WG
RCUE-270AG1 RCUE-270AG
RCUE-280AG2* RCUE-300AG1 RCUE-300AG
RCUE-320AG2*
RCUE-330AG1 RCUE-330AG
RCUE-360AG2* RCUE-360AG1 RCUE-360AG
RCUE-400AG2* RCUE-400AG1 RCUE-400AG
Tab. 1
* Water chiller units with up to two addresses.Take this into account when making the initial calculations or assessing unit dimensions.
Dimension and installation details
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.2. Dimension details
53
83.5
120
120
15
20
RUN/STOP UNITSELECTION
EMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
OUTLET
SET
TEMP.
TEMP.
PR. MPa
CHECKABNMLLOCAL
Fig. 1. CSC-5S central remote control dimensions
3.2.3. Installation
3.2.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices should be activated too often or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the
mains and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the remote control or wiring in the following places: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet. - To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Installation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500mTab. 2
3.2.3.3. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
Atleast50mm
Fig. 2
3.2.3.4. Supply content
NOTE
Before installation, unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box. - All components are in perfect condition. Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package. This package contains the following parts
Name Quant. Comments
Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Tab. 3
NOTE
Bear in mind that the central remote control is divided into two parts:- Central remote control.- Power supply.
Installation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.3.5. Installation procedure
1. Insert the flat headed screwdriver's tip into the grooves on the bottom of the bracket. Push and turn the screwdriver. Remove the part of the remote control linked to the power supply part, as shown in the following figure:
Screwdriver
Bracket
Central control
Groove
Groove
Screwdriver
Bracket
Bracket
Groove
Fig. 3
2. Connect the power supply part to the control box, as shown below.
NOTE
Do not lay the power supply cable and the remote control cable in the same conduit
Power supply part
Control cable Control box
Power supply wire
Screws
Fig.4
3. Connect the control unit part to the power supply part. Position the top first and then the bottom.
Fig. 5
Installation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
1��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.3.6. Electrical connection
I. Electrical wiring connection
$ CAUTION
- Do not position all the signal cables together with the power supply cable and other signal cables. The noise caused by these cables could lead to the malfunction of the remote control and chiller unit. If the signal cables are next to the power cables and any other signal cables, maintain a distance of at least 15 cm between the signal cables and other cables, or pass the signal cables through a metal conduit which is earthed at one end.
- If the power supply cable is accidentally connected to the terminal board for the transmission signal and voltage is applied, the fuse will blow to protect the printed circuit board. In this case, this remote control can operate without the fuse, if pin no. 2 of DSW3 is set to the ON position.
- If the PSC-5T remote control's timer is used, set the same address no. for the remote control and the timer.- Make sure that the wiring is correct (do place the signal cables together with the electricity cables). Incorrect
wiring could cause the remote control to malfunction- Before installing the wiring, switch off the power supply to the air conditioning system and central control unit.- Installing the wiring while the central control power supply is switched on may cause the central control unit to
malfunction.
Electrical connection of the CSC-5S central remote control with the PSC-5T timer
NOTE
- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one CSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different
remote control. The timer can then be connected to the other remote.
Outdoorunits(uptoamaximumof8units)
1 21 2
PSC-5TConnector
Terminal1 2
CSC-5S
CN1TB21 2 1 2 3
TB1
FG
Powersource220Vcaor240V
ToTB2ofanotherremotecontrol
Twistedpaircable1P-0,75mm2(max.100m)
Accessorycable(1m)
H-LINK
Fig. 6
NOTE
- Always use 0.75 mm2 twisted pair cable.- Use the field supply cable for connection if the CSC-5S central remote control is used together with the PSC-5T.- The maximum total length of the wiring for all units is 1000 metres.
Installation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
200TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
II. DIP switch adjustment
If connecting more than one central control (up to a maximum of 8) to the H-LINK system, first set the address using the DIP switch DSW1, as shown below:
NOTE
The DIP switches are deactivated before leaving the factory.
Pin no. Setting contentDSW SETTING
CommentsON OFF
DSW1
1
Settheaddress Consultthefollowingtable. Necessarywhenmorethantwounitsareconnected.2
3
4 Connectioncheck.Settingunavailable
Settingavailable.
H-Link(CSC-5Schiller).
DSW2
1 Monitormode.Multiplecontrol.
Individualcontrol.
2 Outputsignaltimefortransmission.
60s 30s
3 - - -
4 - - -
Tab. 4
III. Address setting with DSW1
Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Address6 Address7 Address8
Tab. 5
Split the central control power supply line from the main power supply line using a junction box, as shown in the following diagram:
PSC-5S
PSC-5S1 2 3 4 5 6(7)0
Upto8CSC-5S
FirstCSC-5C SecondCSC-5S
Fig. 7
Installation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
201TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
IV. Group registration procedure
• Supplying power to the unit.
$ CAUTION
- The unit should be powered for at least 12 hours before starting it up to protect the compressor.- Do not interrupt the electrical current while the air conditioning system is in use.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press and hold the “GROUP” button for at least 3 seconds.Thethirddigitfigurewillstarttoflash.Thisdigitindicatestheminimumamountofunitscontrolledbythiscontroller.Iftheaddressofthecontrollerisnotsetto“1”andthegroupdoesnotregister,thecontrollerbuttononlyindicatesthethirddigit.
INDVDL
ThirddigitSeconddigitFirstdigit
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.
Thenumberofunitstobeconnectedisindicatedsequentially.Thisservestosetthemaximumnumberofunits.
INDVDL
• Press the “GROUP” button.Thefirstdigitflashesandthemaximumnumberofunitsisindicated INDVDL
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Thenumberoftheunitstobeconnectedwhichexceedtheminimumnumberofunitsissequentiallyindicated.Thisservestosetthemaximumnumberofunits.
INDVDL
• Press and hold the “GROUP” button for at least 3 seconds.Thesettingofthegroupsisappliedandthecontrolreturnstonormalmode. INDVDL
NOTE
- If the “RESET” button is pressed or no other button is pressed for more than 30 seconds, the group registration mode will automatically exit to normal mode. (If this occurs, the group registration will not be set).
- Group registration cannot be carried out during unit operation. If this procedure is carried out, “NO FUNC.” will appear on the display.- Do no set the same unit no. when two or more controllers are connected. If you do, the “E002” alarm code may appear on the controller
with the highest address.You must then set the correct address no. on the controller with the “E002” alarm code.
Operation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
202TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.4 Operation
3.2.4.1. Description
UnitoperatingindicatorIndividualcontrolindicatorMultipleunitcontrolindicatorTimerindicatorEmergencystopindicatorOperationindicatorforeachunitDemandindicator“NoFunction”indicator,intheevenofamalfunction
MODECHANGE A/CH.STRG
TIMER OPTION GROUP
TEMP
CHECK
RESETDISP.MODE
RUN/STOP UNITSELECTION
EMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
OUTLET
SET
TEMP.
TEMP.
PR. MPa
CHECKABNMLLOCAL
Fig. 8 Model: CSC-5S
OperationmodeindicationIndicatestheoperationmodeselectedfortheindicatedgroup:“Cool”(cooling),“Heat”(heating)and“H.RCV”(heatrecovery)(notavailable).
Runindicator(redpilot).
“RUN/STOP”button.
“MODE”button(operationmodeselection).
“A/CH.STRG”button(air-conditioning/heatstorge).
“TIMER”button(timerselection).
“OPTION”buttonUsedforselectingthedifferentoptions.
Botón“GROUP”(paraajustedegrupos).
“MODE”button(buttonforchangingdisplay).
“TEMP”button(forsettinggroups).
“CHECK”buttonUsedforservicetasks.
“RESET”button(reset).
“UNITSELECTION”button.
TemperaturesettingindicatorInlet/outlettemperatureindicator“ABNML”alarmindicator“LOCAL”localindicator
Tab. 6
Operation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.4.2. Remote controls
Individual remote control
-“INDVDL”appearsonthedisplaypanelduringthistypeofcontrol.Therearetwotypesofcontrolavailable.Oneisthegroupregistration(refertothe“Groupregistrationprocedure”section).Thiscontrolallowseachunittobecontrolled.Theothertypeissimultaneousgroupcontrol.Whentheunitbuttonispressed,theunitnumbersaremodified.“AA”indicatesalltheunits.
-Thecontentsaredifferentdependingontheunit(except“RUN”)andarenotdisplayedwhenunitno.“AA”isindicated.(Forexample,operation/heatstorage,temperaturesetting,local,etc.,mode).
-Theoptionscanbesetbyselectingthefollowingconfiguration.(Consulttheoptionssettingprocedure).Differential“ON/OFF”setting•••Option1.
Multiple unitcontrol
-“MULTI”appearsonthedisplaypanelduringthistypeofcontrol.The“ON/OFF”controlsforunitsconfiguredasgroupregisteredisautomaticallyactivatedbydetectingthetemperaturesettingandtheactualtemperature.(Ifthe“UNITSELECTION”buttonispressedduringthenormalmode,“NOFUNC.”willappearonthescreen).
-Thecontrolofupto8chillerunitsiscarriedoutbydetectingtheminimumwatertemperatureduringcoolingoperationsandthemaximumwatertemperatureduringheatingoperations,respectively.
-Fortheinlet(outlet)watertemperature,thechillerunitsarecontrolledbytheminimum/maximuminlet(outlet)watertemperaturedetectedontheunitsofthesamegroup.
-Theoptionscanbesetbyselectingthefollowingconfiguration:(Consult3.2.6.1.Externalinletandoutletfunction).Differential“ON/OFF”setting•••Option1.Inletoroutletwatertemperaturecontrolselection•••Option2.Selectionoftheavailabilityofthecapacitycontrolforthelastunittostop•••Option3.Selectionoftheavailabilityofthe“ON/OFF”controlofthepumpoftheunitstoppedbythethermostat•••Option4.
Tab. 7
NOTE
- This control function is selected by setting pin no. 1 of the DSW2 to “ON” or “OFF”. This setting is required before the units are energised. (This setting cannot be changed after energising the unit).
- If you need to change this setting, contact your local installer.
3.2.4.3. Operation procedure
I. Operation mode setting
“COOL”:Coldwatercoolingoperation“HEAT”:Hotwaterheatingoperation“H.RCV”(heatrecovery):Notavailable.• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press the “MODE CHANGE” button.Theindicationchangesinthefollowingorderwitheachkeystroke:
COOL HEAT
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
Operation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
II. Selecting and monitoring a unit's status
This controller can control a maximum of 8 units individually or simultaneously. With this controller, the unit can be started up and its operational status can be controlled.
NOTE
The UNIT SELECTION buttons are used to select the unit, but those that are not registered in the group will not appear.
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Whenthebuttonispressed,thesequenceoftheunitsischangesasshownbelow.AAselectsalltheunits.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
Number of the selected unit
Number of registered units
Thecurrentoperationstatusoftheselectedmodeisdisplayed.The“{”symbolshowstheunit'sstatus: -“OFF”: Stopped -“ON”: Operating -Flashing: AlarmThestatusindicatedbythe“RUN”pilotlight: -“OFF”: Allunitsstopped -“ON”: Morethanoneunitoperating -Flashing: Alarmformorethanoneunit
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
III. Setting the temperature
$ CAUTION
- Do not press the “CHECK” button.- The “CHECK” button is only used for service tasks.- If the check mode is accidentally accessed, press the “RESET” button to return to
the previous mode.
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press the buttonSettherequiredtemperaturewiththe“TEMP”▲▼button,eachpressincreasesorreducesthetemperaturebyonedegree,thetemperaturesettingrangevariesdependingontheunittobeconfigured.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
NOTE
- The set temperature will change continuously if the button is held down.- If multiple unit control is selected and the “UNIT SELECTION” button is pressed, “NO FUNC.” will appear on the display.- The unit no. is always “AA” when all the units operate simultaneously in normal mode.
Operation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
205TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
IV. Procedure for changing the display mode
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press the button “DISP. MODE”.Thesettingtemperatureindicationautomaticallychanges,asshownbelow.Theinformationonthedisplayvariesasfollows:
InletWaterLightOffOutletTemperatureLightOff
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
V. Operation procedure
• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press the"RUN/STOP" button.Theselectedunitisstartedorstoppedwiththisbutton.If“AA”isselected,alltheunitsstartorstopatthesametime.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
NOTE
- The instructions above show an example of unit no. 4 in operation.To operate another unit, use the same procedure. If you want to select all units, select “AA”.
- When power is reconnected to the CSC-5S after a power failure, the chiller unit will stop working for safety reasons.Consequently, the operation procedure must be carried out again after connecting the power supply.
- If the chiller unit is restarted by the CSC-5S after reconnecting the power supply, reboot the chiller unit and wait for more than 30 sec. after the power supply is reconnected.
- The CSC-5S unit automatically checks the connection after the power is connected. (Unit nos. 1 to 8 are displayed on the liquid crystal display). During the connection check, wait a moment until CSC-5S operation is available.
VI. Timer operation
Thisisthefunctionusedtosetthe“ON/OFF”operationstofunctionviathedetectionofthesignalfromtheoptionalcontroltimerconnected(PSC-5T).• Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Press the “TIMER” button.Whenthe“TIMER”buttonispressed,itactivatesthetimerinthesetunit,whichwillstarttodependingontheschedulesetonthetimer.The“TIMER”indicationappearsontheLCD.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
NOTE
Set the same address number for the remote control and the control timer.
Operation
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
VII. LCD screen indications
• Normal indications
“LOCAL”:“LOCAL”appearsonthedisplaywhenthechillerunitissettolocal.Settingscannotbechangedfromthecontrollerwhenthisindicationison.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
“DEMAND”:Functionunavailable
“EMG. (Emergency) STOP:“EMG.STOP”appearsonthedisplaywhenitdetectsaninputsignalinthecontroller'sport2.
EMG. STOP INDVDL
SET TEMP.
• Alarm indicationsAbnormal condition:-Ifthereisanabnormalconditiononanyoftheunit,theoperationpilotlight“{”thatindicates
thestatusofthatunitwillflash.-The"ABNL"indicationwillbedisplayedontheLCDscreen.-Theunitno.,alarmcodeand
nominalindicationareshownalternately.-Ifthealarmcodeoccursinmultiplecontrolunits,theunitno.andalarmcodeoftheunitwith
thelowestno.aredisplayedsequentially.-Checkthealarmcodeandcontacttheinstaller.
INDVDL
SET TEMP.
ABNML
Power failure:-Alltheindicationsareoff.-Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailure,itwillnotrestartautomatically,evenwhenthepowerisrestored.Followthe
start-upproceduresagain.-Whentheunitstopsduetoapowerfailureoflessthan2seconds,itwillrestartautomaticallywhenthepowerisrestored.Noise:-Alltheindicationshavedisappearedandinsomecasestheunitstops.Thismeansthatthemicroprocessorhasactivated
toprotecttheequipmentfromthenoise.Followthestart-upproceduresagain.
Optional functions
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
207TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.5. Optional functions
External inlet and outlet function
NOTE
- With individual control, only option no. 1 is available.- If the RESET button is pressed or no other button is pressed for more than 30 seconds in the option setting
procedures, the option setting mode will change back to the normal mode without setting the options. (In this case the setting is not saved).
- The option setting is not available during operation. If the OPTION button is pressed during operation, NO FUNC. will appear on the display
- If the UNIT SELECTION button is pressed during multiple unit control, NO FUNC. will appear on the display.
Setting optional functions
• Press the UNIT SELECTION button.Selecttheunittobeset.
NOTE
This procedure cannot be carried out for the control of multiple units.
MULTI
• Press and hold the “OPTION” button for at least 3 seconds.Thefirstoptionalfunctionsettingdigitflashes.
MULTI
• Press the “OPTION” button.Repeatedlypressthe“OPTION”buttonuntiltheno.oftherequiredoptionisindicatedandthenpressthe“TEMP”button.Thesecondoptionalfunctionsettingdigitflashes.
NOTE
The numbers of the available optional functions are shown in table 7.
MULTI
• Press the “OPTION” button.Repeatedlypressthe“OPTION”buttonuntiltheno.oftherequiredoptionisindicatedandthenpressthe“TEMP”button.Foroptionno.2,select“INLET”or“OUTLET”.
NOTE
The numbers of the available optional functions are shown in Tab.8.
MULTI
• Press and hold the “OPTION” the button for at least 3 seconds.Theoptionalfunctionselectedwillbesaved.
MULTI
Option no.
Setting Setting contentSetting
sentIndividual
controlMultiple unit
control
Option 12 Set the differential at 2 degrees
and and� Set the differential at � degrees� Set the differential at � degrees
Option 2Inlet Inlet temperature control and
andOutlet Inlet temperature control
Option �0 Available for capacity control of the unit that stops
operating last and
and
1 Unavailable for capacity control of the unit that stops operating last
Option �0 The pump starts up after thermostat turns off. and
and1 The pump stops after the thermostat turns off.*
Tab. 8
Optional functions and Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
208TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
* The water pump continues to operate even in the thermostat off state.
This controller (CSC-5S) has a 2 input and 2 output channel, connected as follows:
Pin1and2ofCN2 Externalinput1 Simultaneous operation and stoppage input (level signal)
Pin2and3ofCN2 Externalinput2 Emergency stop input (level signal)
Pin1and2ofCN3 Externaloutput1 Simultaneous operation output (level signal)
Pin1and3ofCN3 Externaloutput2 Simultaneous alarm output (level signal)
CN2321
CN3321
Cablewithconnector(option):PCC-1A
InletcontactAnovoltage
RYa
Cableofmorethan0.5mm2
(fieldsupply,maxlenght:70m)
Fig. 9
Use the optional wiring assembly with the connector (PCC-1A) to connect the external inputs and outputs. Omron MY type relays are recommended for the external output.
3.2.6. Maintenance and repair
3.2.6.1. Chiller unit checking procedure
The check mode indicates � types of contents:- Details on the operating status, the chiller unit no. etc., are shown on the display.
Consult table 8- The contents of abnormal stoppages with safety device activation are indicated with up to a max. of 10 details.- The capacity control status is indicated.
I. Changing to check mode
- Press the “CHECK” button for more than � seconds, the control changes to the check mode and indicates several details (see below)
- On pressing the “CHECK” button the indication changes, as shown below:
VariousData AlarmHistory CapacityControlState
Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
20�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
“Various Data” indication
- Pressing the “TEMP” button will display the following data:
Indication code
Indication contents Unit Comments
C1Pd ~ C�Pd Discharge pressure. MPa
Indicates a máx. of � details on the chilling circuit.
C1Ps ~ C�Ps Suction pressure. MPaC1td ~ C�td Discharge gas temperature. °CC1ts ~ C�ts Suction gas temperature. °CC1tr ~ C�tr Liquid refrigerant temperature. °CCEL Inlet water temperature. °CCoL Outlet water temperature. °CCcoL Individual water pipe outlet temperature. °C The details shown on the display will
depend on the chiller unit. tSC Chilled water temperature setting. °CtSH Hot water temperature setting. °CtSCd Analogue chilled water temperature setting. °CtSHd Analogue hot water temperature setting. °CdF Differential setting. °CtA Ambient temperature. °CCrno Chiller unit ROM no.CvEr Chiller unit version no.rno Controller ROM no.
Tab. 9
NOTE
On pressing the “TEMP”▲ button once, the indication code is displayed, and when pressed again, its value is displayed. If the other button▼ is pressed, it will change in the opposite order.
- Press “UNIT SELECTION” to select the unit to be set; the indications always start with C1Pd.
III. “Alarm History” indication
- Press the “UNIT SELECTION” button to see the previous alarms, up to a maximum of 10 details.
IV. “Capacity Control State” indication
- The capacity control status is indicated.- Individual control: The capacity of each unit is indicated when the “UNIT SELECTION” button is pressed.- Multiple unit control: The total capacity of the group is indicated.
NOTE
If you press the “RESET” button or if you do not press any button for 30 seconds, the control returns to normal operation mode.
Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
210TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.6.2. Controller reboot procedure
I. Reboot procedure
Step No. Action required
1
Pressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.UNIT
SELECTIONMODE
5
NOTE
If a group is running, the NO FUNCTION indication will appear and the central station will not change to self-check mode.
3
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,inself-checkmode.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
âPR.
LOCAL
For1second
2
âOUTLET
ABNML
For1second
3
âEMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
TEMP.
CHECK
For1second
4
â
SET TEMP.
MPa
For1second
5
âEMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
OUTLET
SET
TEMP.
TEMP.
PR. MPa
CHECKABNMLLOCAL
For3seconds(Allindicationson)
6
â
TodeleteEEPROMmemoryonly,pressthethreefollowingbuttonssimultaneouslyduringtheLCDscreenchanges.
UNITSELECTION
MODE
5
Goto5
4 Ifthecombinationisnotentered,thetestwillbecompleteandthescreenwillgoblank,itcanthenbeusedagain.
5
TheLCDscreenwillchange,asshownbelow,instart-upmode.
No. LCDindication Action
1
âAfterpressingthethree
buttons
2
âPressRESET
3
âThe“EEPROM”iserased
and0
4
âThesystemwillstartup
NOTE
In�this�condition:Press�“CHECK”�if�start-up�is�not�required,�and�the�system�will�return�to�operation�mode.
Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
211TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.6.3. Self-check mode
I. Changing to self-check mode
$ CAUTION
Switch off all the groups of units.
Step No. Action required
1
Self-checkmodewillstart,andthefollowingsequenceofimageswillappearonscreenPressthefollowingthreebuttonssimultaneously.
UNITSELECTION
MODE
5 NOTE
If a group is running, the NO FUNCTION indication will appear and the central station will not change to self-check mode.
3
LCD(liquidcrystaldisplay)check:thisiscarriedoutautomatically.
No. LCDindication Indicationperiod(seconds)
1
âPR.
LOCAL
For1second
2
âOUTLET
ABNML
For1second
3
âEMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
TEMP.
CHECK
For1second
4
â
SET TEMP.
MPa
For1second
5
âEMG. STOP
MULTI
INDVDL
INLET
OUTLET
SET
TEMP.
TEMP.
PR. MPa
CHECKABNMLLOCAL
For3seconds(Allindicationson)
6
â
4• RUN pilot light check. TheRUNpilotlightwillflashtwice.
5• Button input and DSW check. PressallthebuttonsandsettheDSWtoONorOFFalternately,checkingthatthenumber"29"isindicatedasthenormalinputnumber.
6• Transmission circuit check. Thischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.
7
• External output check. Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN3.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -SwitchonLED1for2seconds -SwitchonLED2for2seconds -SwitchoffLED1andLED2for2seconds -SwitchonLED1andLED2 (TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).
Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
212TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
8
• External input check.Prepareacable,asshowninFigure10,andconnectittoCN2.Thecheckprocedureisasfollows: -Whenbutton1issettoON,LED1willbeON -Whenbutton1issettoOFFandbutton2issettoON,LED2willbeON -Whenbuttons1and2aresettoON,LED1andLED2willbeON -(TheLEDlightwillremainonuntil“CHECK”ispressed).
9• EEPROM check(Consult3.2.6.2.Controllerrebootprocedure)
10• IC check for the control timerThischeckiscarriedoutautomatically.
LED1
LED2
CN3
1
2
3
Resistance
CN2
1
2
3
Button2
Button1
Fig. 10
Remote control optional accessories
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
3.2.7. Remote control optional accessories
3.2.7.1. Remote control cable (PRC-10E1~PRC-30E1)
Optional cable for remotes PC-P1HE, PC-P2HTE, PSC-5S, PC-P5H and PC-RLH8/�/11
During installation, connect and solder a twisted remote control cable (0.75 mm² X 2 wires) or use an optional extension wire for the remote control.
For more information on this cable, see the following table:
Model Length (m) Cable type Specifications
PRC-10E1 10 TPCØ5mmcolourbeige
(2twistedcables) Ø1.32mm(Ø0.18mmx12wires)IndoorunitPCB
sideRemotecontrol
side
A BCable colour Black White
PRC-15E1 15 TPC
PRC-20E1 20 TPC
*PRC-30E1 30 TPC
Tab. 10*:Madetoorder.TPC:Twistedpaircable
3.2.7.2. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.A set includes five 3-pin connector cords
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB.
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector(“XARP-3”ofJST)
300mm(approx.)
Tab. 11
CSC-5S
Technical catalogue
21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
CSC-5S
Table of contents
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
215TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3. PSC-5T...................................................................................................217
3.3.1. GeneraldetailsSelectionadvantages....................................................217
3.3.2. DimensionDetails...................................................................................218
3.3.3. Installation..............................................................................................218
3.3.3.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2183.3.3.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2193.3.3.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2203.1.3.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................2233.3.3.5.DIPswitchadjustment........................................................................................224
3.3.4. Operation................................................................................................225
3.3.4.1.Description.........................................................................................................2253.3.4.2.Operationmodeselectionprocedure.................................................................226
3.3.5. Remotecontroloptionalaccessories.....................................................229
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
General details
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
217TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3. PSC-5T
3.3.1. General details Selection advantages
The PSC-5T is a programmable weekly timer that can be used together with other remote controls that do not have the a built in weekly timer option, so that when they are connected they are fully timer controlled.
I. General features:
- The 7 days of the week and the start/stop times can be scheduled up to � times a day with the PSC-5T timer.
- The remote control can be deactivated during the stoppage time (if it is used with the PSC-5S and PC-P1HE).
- It has two types of weekly schedules (A and B), which can easily be changed for winter and summer periods.
- All the settings are digitally displayed allowing the operation and settings to be checked easily.
- The power failure safety function prevents the timer from stopping during a power cut (even if it lasts for weeks).
II. Remote control compatibility
NOTE
This remote control can be used with a second remote in order to enable the timer function.
This remote control is 100% compatible with the following controls:
Remote control Central control Wireless remote control
PC-P1HE PSC-5S PC-RLH8PC-P2HTE PC-RLH9
PC-P5H PC-RLH11
PC-RLH13
Tab. 1
Dimension and installation details
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
218TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.2. Dimension Details
46
1212012
0
17
83.5
>ABS<
HOUR-MINUTESET/MONITOR
Fig. 1. PSC-5T central control dimensions
3.3.3. Installation
3.3.3.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices should be activated too often or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the
mains and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
21�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.3.2. Installation site selection
Take note of the maximum admissible cable length between units and the control as well as between the units themselves, as shown in the following table:
Cablesection 0.3mm2 ≥ 0.75mm2
Cablelength 30m 500m
Tab. 2
I. Space necessary for the installation
If several control units are to be installed in a vertical position, leave a distance of at least 50 mm between them to allow the front cover to be opened and to insert the tool for removing the control from its housing.
Atleast50mm
Fig. 2
II. Prior to installation
NOTE
Unpack the unit and check that:- All the required components are supplied in the box.- All components are in perfect condition.Otherwise, contact the manufacturer.
Check the content and the number of accessories in the package.
Name Quant. Comments
Remotecontrol 1 Forcontrollingsystemoperation.
M4x16Lscrews 2 Forfixingthebrackettothewall
Cable(1m) 1 Forremotecontrol-timerconnection.
Tab. 3
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
220TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.3.3. Installation procedure
1. Using a flat-head screwdriver, separate the control unit bracket from the front section, as indicated below:
Screwdriver
Bracket
Central Control
Groove
Groove
BracketScrewdriver
Bracket
Indentpart
Fig. 3
2. Secure the timer to the bracket and connect the cable as illustrated below.
I. In cases where the remote control cable is exposed.
1. Fix the bracket to the wall using the screws supplied
Screws(accessories)
Attachthebracketwiththemarkupwards
Fig. 4
2. Select and cut the knockout hole through which to pass the cable.
Determinthepositionofthewiringanddrilloneoftheholesmarkedwith*inthediagram.Ifusinganaccessorycable,drillaholeonthebottom.
Fig. 5
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
221TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
�. Insert the cable through the hole/s.
Attachthebandtothecableinsidetheknockouthole Cable
Cabletie(fieldsupply)
Twistedpaircable
Cable
Cabletie(fieldsupply)
Accessorycable
Fig. 6
NOTE
Strip the protective insulation from the accessory cable supplied, if used.
�. Connect the cable to the PCB plate connector or to the terminal.
Connector
Terminalboard
Fig. 7
5. Fix the timer to the bracket.
Step1:Insertthehooksofthetimerintotheholesonthetopofthebracket.
Step2:Pushthebottompartofthetimertowardsthebracket.
Step3:Thetimerwillclickwhenitissecuredinplace.Checkthatthefourhooksarecorrectlyinserted.
Fig. 8
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
222TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
II. If using an electrical box
There are different types of electrical boxes available on the market that can be used for this installation, for example: - Electrical box for one remote control unit (without cover).
- Electrical box for 2 remote control units (without cover). - Electrical box for one remote control unit (with cover). - Electrical box for 2 remote control units (with cover). - Output box (with cover).
1. Prepare the electrical box.
2. Pass the cable through the wall duct.
Fig. 9
�. Attach the bracket to the electrical box.
Screws(accessories)
Attachthebracketwiththemarkupwards
Fig. 10
�. Connect the cable to the PCB connector or to the terminals.
Connector
Terminalboard
Fig. 11
5. Fix the timer to the bracket
Step1:Insertthehooksofthetimerintotheholesonthetopofthebracket.
Step2:Pushthebottompartofthetimertowardsthebracket.
Step3:Thetimerwillclickwhenitissecuredinplace.Checkthatthefourhooksarecorrectlyinserted.
Fig. 12
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.1.3.4. Electrical connection
This section explains how to electrically connect the timer to another remote control or to the central station.
$ CAUTION
- Use a twisted pair cable (1P - 0.75 mm2) as a transmission cable to avoid possible communication errors. If the cable exceeds 30m in length, use:
- Shielded pair cable (connected to earth protection on one side). - Normal pair cable.- The transmission cable and the remote control cable must be kept at least 30cm apart.
I. Timer combined with PC-P1HE or PC-P5H or wireless remote control receiver
Indoorunit
PC-P1HEPSC-5T
Transmissioncablebetweentheindoorandoutdoorunits(H-LINK)
Twistedpaircable1P-0.75mm2(max.100m)fieldsupply
Fig. 13
II. Timer combined with PSC-5S central control
NOTE
- Up to 8 PSC-5S central control units and one PSC-5T timer can be connected to one H-Link.- When installing the timer on an RPK unit, first disable the wireless remote control and then connect a different
remote control. The timer can then be connected to the other remote.
PSC-5T PSC-5STB2Connector
Outdoorunit
Indoorunits
Controls
Accessorycable(1m)
Toothercentralstations
220Vcaor240VpowersupplyCN1
Twistedpaircable1P-0.75mm2(max.100m)
AvailableforH-Linkconnection(toconnecttotheindoorortotheoutdoorunitterminalboards1and2)
Fig. 14
Installation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.3.5. DIP switch adjustment
Set the PCB board DIP switches as indicated below.
NOTE
The switches settings are deactivated at the factory.
DSW1
DSW2
Fig. 15
I. DIP switch adjustment
Pin no. Setting contentDSW setting
CommentsOFF ON
DSW1
1
SetaddressConsultthefollowingtable
Thesettingneedonlybemadewhenthecentralstation(PSC-5S)isusedincombination.Settheaddressofthecentralstationthatyouwishtocontrol.2
3
4 Foruseinconjunctionwithanotherremotecontrol
ExceptPC-P1HE
PC-P1HESetpinno.4toONifusingthePC-P1HEremotecontrolincombination.
DSW2
1Settheremotecontrolfunctionallimitafterthescheduledstoppagetime
Settingunavailable
Settingavailable
ThissettingisonlyavailablewhenusedinconjunctionwiththePSC-5ScentralstationorthePC-P1HEremotecontrol.Theremotecontrolswillnotfunctionafterthescheduledstoppagetimeisset,andwillonlybecomeavailableafterthestart-upcommand.
2 Foruseinconjunctionwithanotherremotecontrol
PSC-5SExceptPSC-5S
Setpinno.2accordingtotheremotecontrolusePSC-5S.
3 Nofunction - - Donotchangethe“OFF”setting.
4 Nofunction - - Donotchangethe“OFF”setting.
Tab. 4
II. Address setting with DSW1
Address1 Address2 Address3 Address4 Address5 Address6 Address7 Address8
Tab. 5
Operation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
225TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.4. Operation
3.3.4.1. Description
Currenttimeindicator.
Fig. 16. Model: PSC-5T
TimesettingandholidayindicationIndicatesthe“SET”or“MONITOR”operationmodeandtheholiday.
Currentdayindications.
Rundayindication.Thisindicatorappearswhenadayisset.
Runindicator(greenpilotlight).
“SET/MONITOR”operationmodeselectionbuttonWhenthisbuttonispressed,theremotecontroltimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthesymbolwillflash.Ifpressedagain,"SET"modewillswitchoffandthesystemwillchangefromsettingmodetomonitormode.
A/Bsettingmodeselectionbutton.Pressthisbuttontoselectthemodeyouwishtoswitchon(AorB).Therearetwo(2)modes(AandB)setfortheweeklyschedule.Eachmodecanbesetto“ON”/“OFF”three(3)timesaday,sevendaysaweek.
Holidaysettingbutton.Bypressingthisbutton,withthetimerinsettingmode("SET"),the"HOLI"indicationwillappearandtheselecteddaywillbesetasaholiday.Pressingthebuttonagaincancelstheholidaysetting.
Currenttimesettingbutton.Bypressingthisbutton,the"SET"indicatorandsymbolwillflash,allowingtheusertosetthecurrenttime.
Weekdaysettingbutton.Withthetimerinsettingmode("SET"),usethisbuttontoselecttheweekday.Bypressingthisbutton,thesymbolmovesintheorder“Sun>Moon>...>Sat”.Pressing"DAY"after"Sat"willselectallmarks.Ifpressedagain,thesymbolwillreturntoSun.
"RUNDAY"settingbutton.Pressing“RUNDAY”,willsettheselecteddayastherundayandthesymbolwillappear.Ifpressedagain,itwillswitchoffandcanceltheselectedday.
“SELECT”settingselectionbutton.Bypressing“SELECT”,theusercanselectelement1,2or3forboth"ONTIME"and"OFFTIME".
“ON/OFFTIMER”settingselectionbutton.Whenthetimerisin"SET"mode,pressing"ON/OFFTIMER",willswitchthetimertothe"ON/OFF"settingmodeandthe"ONTIME"indicationwillflash.
Settingtime“CANCEL”button.Bypressingthisbuttonwhenthetimerisset,the"ONTIME"or"OFFTIME"indicationwilldisappear.
“OK”button.Pressingthisbuttonacceptstheselectedsettingprocess.
“HOUR-MINUTE”settingbutton.Pressingorwiththetimerinsettingmode("SET")adjuststhehoursandminutes.
“ONTIME”and“OFFTIME”settingindication.Indicatesthesettingconditionsfortheselectedday.
Indicationofweeklyschedulemode(AorB).
Tab. 6
Operation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
3.3.4.2. Operation mode selection procedure
I. Setting the current date and time
• Supplying power to the unit.
$ CAUTION
- The unit should be powered for at least 12 hours before starting it up to protect the compressor.- Do not interrupt the electrical current while the air conditioning system is in use.
Thediagramontherightshowsthecurrenttimesetto0:00AMon“Sunday”.(Whenthepowerisswitchedon,thecurrenttimeisnotset).
• Press and hold the “PRESENT” button for at least 3 seconds.Thescreenwillswitchtothecurrenthoursettingmode,andtheSETindicatorand▼symbolwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsacaseinwhichneitherthe"ON"timenor"OFF"timeareset.
• Set the current day by pressing the “DAY” button.Pressthe“OK”buttonaftersettingthecurrentday;the▼signwillswitchonandthetimeindicationwillflash.ThediagramontherightwillshowthedaysettingasFriday.
• Set the current time by pressing “HOUR/MINUTE” or .Pressthe"OK"buttonaftersettingthecurrenttime;theminuteindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthehoursetto5PM.
NOTE
12:00AM is shown as 00:00PM
• Set the current minutes by pressing “HOUR/MINUTE” or .Press"OK"aftersettingthecurrentminutes;thecurrentdayandtimewillbesetandthetimesettingmodewillswitchtomonitormode.Theminuteindicationwillswitchonand"SET"willgooff.Thediagramontherightshowstheminutesettingat15.
II. Changing weekly schedule mode (A or B)
NOTE
- There are 2 modes (A and B) set for the weekly schedule.- For each mode, three run times and three stoppage times can be set per day.- They are used for selecting the mode to be set and used.- Modes A and B can be used to set weekly or seasonal operating schedules.
• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button.Theremotecontroltimerwillswitchtosettingmodeandthe"SET”indicationwillappear.
• Press the “A/B” button.Settingmodeischanged(fromAtoB)bypressingA/B.ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.
• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button."SET"modeisswitchedoffandsettingmodeswitchestomonitormode.
Operation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
227TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
III. Time settings for: On/Off
• Press the “SET/MONITOR” button.Theremotecontroltimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsanexampleoftheswitchtosettingmode.
• Select schedule mode A or B by pressing "A/B".
• Select the day of the week on which to set the “ON/OFF” controlWhen"DAY"ispressed,theflashingsymbol▼willmoveinthefollowingsequence: “Sun>Moon> ...>Sat”Bypressing"DAY"after"Sat",all▼symbolswillflash(fromSuntoSat).Inthiscase,thesettingisthesameforalldaysoftheweek.Bypressingthe"DAY"buttononcemore,theflashingsymbol▼ willreturnto“Sun”.• Press the "ON/OFF TIME" button.Thetimerwillswitchto"ON/OFF"timesettingmodeandthe"ONTIME"indicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowstheswitchto"ON/OFF"timesettingmode.
• Select setting 1, 2 or 3 by pressing "SELECT".When"SELECT"ispressed,thetimeindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsetting2.
• Set the "ON TIME" by pressing the "HOUR/MINUTE" button or.Aftersettingthetimeindication,press"OK";the"ONTIME"minuteindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto1PM:--
• Set the "ON TIME" minutes by pressing "HOUR/MINUTE" or .Aftersettingtheminuteindication,press"OK";the"OFFTIME"timeindicationwillflash.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto1:00PM.
• Set the "OFF TIME”.Followthesameprocedureasthatusedtosettheontime.Thediagramontherightshowsthetimesetto5:00PM.
• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.Thediagramontherightshowsthecurrentdaysettingcondition.
NOTE
By pressing this button when the timer is set, the "ON TIME" or "OFF TIME" indication will disappear.
Operation
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
228TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
IV. Setting the Run day
• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.Thetimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.
• Select mode A or B by pressing "A/B".ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.
• Set the run day by pressing the "DAY" button.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".
• Press the "RUN DAY" buttonTheselecteddaywillbesetastherundayandthesymbolwillswitchonfortheselectedday.Bypressing“RUNDAY”again,therundaysettingwillbecancelledandthesymbolwillswitchoff.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".
• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.
V. Holiday setting
NOTE
This setting temporarily cancels the operating schedule.The scheduled operation will be cancelled only for the day set as a holiday, afterwards the scheduled operation will once again be available. This function is used in the event of an irregular holiday.
• Press the "SET/MONITOR" button.Thetimerswitchestosettingmode,the"SET"indicationwillappearandthe▼symbolwillflash.
• Select schedule mode A or B by pressing "A/B".ThediagramontherightshowstheselectionofsettingmodeB.
• Select the day to be set as a holiday by pressing the "DAY" button.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".
• Press the "HOLIDAY" button.The"HOLI"indicationwillswitchonandtheselecteddaywillbesetasaholiday.Bypressing"HOLIDAY"again,theholidaysettingiscancelled.
• Press "SET/MONITOR".The"SET"indicationwillgooffandtheremotecontroltimerwillswitchtomonitormode.
$ CAUTION
If the current day is set as a holiday, the holiday setting will be active from that moment on and the programmed mode is cancelled until the following day. In this case, the same day of the subsequent week will not be a holiday.
Operation and Remote control optional accessories
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
22�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
VI. Checking the setting content
• Press the "DAY" button in monitor modeThe▼ symbolmovesandthedaysettingcontentisindicatedwiththe▼symbol.Inthediagramontheright,theselectionissetto"Tuesday".
$ CAUTION
- The remote control has a built-in backup battery, making the clock function available for 2 weeks in the event of power failure. If the power failure should last for more than 2 weeks, the current time will need to be reset.
- The "RUN" indicator will switch on at the "ON" time and switch off at the "OFF" time. If the indoor unit is switched on or off from the control station or remote control used in conjunction with the timer, the "RUN" indicator will not change.
- If the "RUN" indicator is flashing, this indicates an abnormal condition on the timer. Check that the cable connections and DIP switch settings are correct.If the "RUN" indicator continues to flash after the check, contact your dealer or HITACHI supplier.
$ NOTE
- When an on or off order is sent from the timer, it may take around 15 seconds for the order to take effect.- During setting mode, on/off orders cannot be sent to the units.- Once the setting is complete, activate the timer monitor mode. (After remaining in setting mode for 3 minutes,
the timer will switch automatically to monitor mode).- When using the central station timer (PSC-5S), the settings made through the central station are required.
3.3.5. Remote control optional accessories
3.3.5.1. 3-pin connector cord
Optional connector for central controls.
This connector is used when a remote on/off device is connected, or when signals are received from printed circuit boards in indoor and outdoor units.
A set includes five 3-pin connector cords.
Model Application Comments Specifications
PCC-1AOptionalfunctionsoftheoutdoorunitPCB.
JSTXARP-3connectorIfalongcableisrequired,connectandsolderthefieldsupplycables(0.5mm2).
Connector (“XARP-�” of JST)
�00 mm (approx.)
Tab. 7
PSC-5T
Technical catalogue
2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
PSC-5T
Table of contents
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. COMPUTERISEDCENTRALREMOTECONTROLS............................233
4.1. HARC-BXE............................................................................................233
4.1.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................233
4.1.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................2334.1.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................2334.1.1.3.Systemconfiguration..........................................................................................234
4.1.2. Installation..............................................................................................241
4.1.2.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2414.1.2.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2414.1.2.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2424.1.2.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................242
4.1.3. Operation................................................................................................247
4.1.3.1.Testmode...........................................................................................................2474.1.3.2.BMSconnection.................................................................................................2484.1.3.3.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................248
4.1.4. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................249
4.1.4.1.HARC-BXEself-check......................................................................................2494.1.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2504.1.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................251
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4. COMPUTERISED CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLS
4.1. HARC-BX E
4.1.1. General details
4.1.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features
-Thedifferentsystemswithinbuildingssuchaslights,alarms,airconditioning,...,canbefullycontrolledbyjustoneBMS.
-GatewayinterfacewithBMSLonWorks®systems(installationswithintelligentcontrolorBMS).
-HARC-BXEallowsthecontrolofupto5settingpointsandtheremotesupervisionofamaximumof9values.WiththeHARC-BXEconnectedtoaH-LINKnetwork,amaximumof8outdoorunitscanbeusedandupto64indoorunitscontrolled.
-Amaximumof8HARC-BXEcanbeconnectedtothesameH-Link.
-TheHARC-BXEcentralremotecontrolcanbeconnectedtoanypointoftheH-Linksystem.
II. Remote control compatibility
This control should be used together with the remote controls installed for the indoor units, and is compatible with the remote controls listed, bearing in mind that there is no priority between the controls and the HARC-BX:
Individual remote controls Remote receiversPC-P1H PC-RLH9PC-P5H PC-RLH8
PC-RLH11
Tab. 1
This remote control is 100% compatible with the following indoor units:
Set-Free R407C Set-Free R410A Utopia R407C
RCI-FSGE RPC-FSG2E RCI-FSNE RCI-G7E
RPI-FSGE RPF-FSG2E RPI-FSNE RPI-G7E
RPI-FSGE1 RPFI-FSG2E RPC-FSNE RPI-G7R
RPC-FSGE RPK-FSG2M* RPF-FSNE RPC-G7E
RPF-FSG RCD-FSG(1/2) RPFI-FSNE RPF-G7E
RPFI-FSG RCI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSNM RPFI-G7E
RPK-FSGM* RPI-FSG2Ei RCD-FSN RPK-G7M*RCD-FSG RPC-FSG2Ei RCI-FSN1E
RCI-FSG2E RPF-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN1M
RPI-FSG2E RPFI-FSG2Ei RPK-FSN2M*
RPIM-FSNE
RCIM-FSNE
Tab. 2
4.1.1.2. Maintenance advantages
The HARC-BX E remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status. HARC-BX provides the necessary information for the BMS control to easily check the system's operation in addition to the alarms when they occur.
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.1.3. System configuration
The following figure shows the internal configuration of the BMS connection used by the HARC-BX E.This manual describes the HARC-BX E in terms of the rest of equipment necessary to assemble the system, see the enclosed installation manual.
Monitoringequipment
RangeprovidedbyHitachi
LonWorks®*Network
HARC-BXE HARC-BXE
Outdoorunit Outdoorunit
OutdoorunitOutdoorunit
Outdoorunit Outdoorunit
Outdoorunit Outdoorunit
* LonWorks® is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the USA and other countries
Fig. 1
$ CAUTION
Make sure that the shielded cable is earthed.
I. HARC-BX E unit components
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2
Power supply terminal to connect a AC220~2�0V power supply
Earthing terminal.
Terminal board for the transmission of the unit to connect the H-Link
Terminal board for the upper system, to connect the transmission cable for the upper monitoring system
II. Control panel components
MCLR LON- SERV.AC AC E
LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK
LON H-LINKLON H-LINK
Fig. 3
PSW (Push Switch) No. 1 (M.CLR): Press the button to check the quantity of connected units.
7-segment display (1*): This indicates the current HARC-BX E status.
PSW No. 2 (LON-SERV): Press the button (PSW) to transmit the Neuron ID. (Service pin)
8P DSW (DIP Switch) No. 1 (S201) (2*): Setting the system of HARC-BX E DIP switches.
¥ 8P DSW No. 2 (S202) (�*): DIP switch (DSW) for setting the functions of the HARC-BX E.
¦ Power supply LED (PWR): The light is ON when electricity is supplied.
§ Transmission LED (H-L): Transmission status with H-LINK
¨ Upper monitoring system transmission LED (LON): Transmission status with the upper monitoring equipment
(1*)7-segmentdisplay:Readthe“Checkmode”and“Indicationofabnormalconditions”sectionsfordetailsonthe7-segmentdisplay.
(2*)8PDSWNo.1S201:Readthe“DIPswitchadjustment”sectionforfurtherinformationandforHARC-BXEfunctions.
(3*)8PDSWNo.2.S202:Readthe“DIPswitchadjustment”section.8PDSWNo.1andNo.2areusedfortheself-check.Forfurtherdetails,refertothe“HARC-BXEself-check”section.
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
III. HARC-BX E specifications
■ Hardware specifications
Element Specification
Powersupply AC240V±10%(50/60Hz)
Energyconsumption 30W(max)
Externaldimensions Width:240mm,height:285mm,depth:128.5mm(Installedinsidethebox)
Weight 2.3kg
Installationconditions Indoor
Temperatureconditions 0~45°C
Humidityconditions 10~80%(Nodew)
Tab. 3
■ Telecommunication specifications for monobloc air conditioning
Element Specification
Communicationunit Monoblocairconditioning
Communicationscable Non-polar,2wiresystem
Telecommunicationssystem Half-duplextelecommunications
Synchronoussystem Asynchronouscommunicationsystem
Telecommunicationsspeed 9,600bps
Cablelength 1,000m(totallength)
Connectionquantity OptionTypeA:Max.amountofunits:64OptionTypeA:Max.amountofunits:32
Tab. 4
■ Telecommunication specifications for the upper system
Element Specification
Communicationunit Uppermonitoringequipment
Transmissionprotocol LonTalk(*)protocol
Accessmethod PersistentCSMA/CDsystemplanned
Codingsystem DifferentialManchesterCode
Telecommunicationsspeed 78,000bps
Maximumcablelength 500m(totalbuslength)
(*)“LonTalk”isan“EchelonCorporation”trademarkintheUSAandothercountries.
Tab. 5
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
IV. Communication with LonWorks interface
■ HARC-BX(A)The HARC-BX(A) is a LonWorks interface designed for cases where only the control of the units is required and there is no need for unit operation monitoring.
Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolof: ·Upto64indoorunitsand8outdoorunits ·Upto8interfacesperH-Link
a.HARC-BX(A)communicationmode: Thefollowingvariablescanbecontrolledandmonitoredineachoftheinterface's8PCBs:
NetworkvariablesVersion1.0A
nviOnOff_n
nviMode_n
nviSetPoint_n
nviFanSpeed_n
nviProtect_n
nviAllOnOff
nvoOnOff_n
nvoInletTemp_n
7Points/Unit
1Commonpoint
Configurationproperties
nciMaxSendTimenciMinSendTime
Remote
control
Monitor
x8(eachPCB)
Fig. 4
b.XIFfilevariables
SVNT number
Unit number
Variable number
TypeLONMARK SNVT No.
Description Condition Note
0 0 nviOnOff_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
1 0 nviMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
2 0 nviSetPoint_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
3 0 nviFanSpeed_0 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
4 0 nviProtect_0 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
5 0 nvoOnOff_0 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
6 0 nvoInletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
7 1 nviOnOff_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
8 1 nviMode_1 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
9 1 nviSetPoint_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
10 1 nviFanSpeed_1 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
11 1 nviProtect_1 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) file variables list (continued on the next page)
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
(continued from the previous page)
12 1 nvoOnOff_1 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
13 1 nvoInletTemp_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
14 2 nviOnOff_2 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
15 2 nviMode_2 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
16 2 nviSetPoint_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
17 2 nviFanSpeed_2 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
18 2 nviProtect_2 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
19 2 nvoOnOff_2 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
20 2 nvoInletTemp_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
21 3 nviOnOff_3 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
22 3 nviMode_3 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
23 3 nviSetPoint_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
24 3 nviFanSpeed_3 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
25 3 nviProtect_3 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
26 3 nvoOnOff_3 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
27 3 nvoInletTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
28 4 nviOnOff_4 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
29 4 nviMode_4 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
30 4 nviSetPoint_4 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
31 4 nviFanSpeed_4 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
32 4 nviProtect_4 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
33 4 nvoOnOff_4 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
34 4 nvoInletTemp_4 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
35 5 nviOnOff_5 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
36 5 nviMode_5 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
37 5 nviSetPoint_5 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
38 5 nviFanSpeed_5 SNVT_switch 95 FanspeedsettingByte1:Value1:Low,
Value2:Middle,Value3:HighByte2:State0(Fixed)
39 5 nviProtect_5 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
40 5 nvoOnOff_5 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
41 5 nvoInletTemp_5 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) file variables list (continued on the next page)
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
(continued from the previous page)
42 6 nviOnOff_6 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
43 6 nviMode_6 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
44 6 nviSetPoint_6 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
45 6 nviFanSpeed_6 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
46 6 nviProtect_6 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
47 6 nvoOnOff_6 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
48 6 nvoInletTemp_6 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
49 7 nviOnOff_7 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
50 7 nviMode_7 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
51 7 nviSetPoint_7 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
52 7 nviFanSpeed_7 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
53 7 nviProtect_7 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
54 7 nvoOnOff_7 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
55 7 nvoInletTemp_7 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
56 Outdoor nviAllOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN57 nciMaxSendTime 107 Theuseof
standardvaluesisrecommended(donotchange)
58 nciMinSendTime 107
59 nciPwrUp 107
Tab. 6 HARC-BX(A) XIF file variables list
■ HARC-BX(B)The HARC-BX(B) is a LonWorks interface designed for cases that require a more detailed control of the units, in addition to complete unit operation monitoring functions.
Thisinterfaceallowsusto: ·Controlupto32indoorunitsand8outdoorunits ·Connectupto8interfacesperH-Link
a.HARC-BX(B)communicationmode:
Thefollowingvariablescanbecontrolledandmonitoredineachoftheinterface's8PCBs:
NetworkvariablesVersion1.0B
nviOnOff_n
nviMode_n
nviSetPoint_n
nviFanSpeed_n
nviProhibit_n
nvoOnOff_n
nvoInletTemp_n
14Points/Unit
2Commonpoints
Configurationproperties
nciMaxSendTimenciMinSendTime
Remote
control
Monitor
x4(eachPCB)
nviAllOnOff
nviLouvre_n
nvoMode_n
nvoSetPoint_n
nvoFanSpeed_n
nvoLouvre_n
nvoAlarm_n
nvoOutletTemp_n
nvoAmbientTemp
Fig. 5
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
SVNT number
Unit number
Variable name TypeLONMARK SNVT No.
Description Condition Note
0 0 nviOnOff_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
1 0 nviMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
2 0 nviSetPoint_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
3 0 nviFanSpeed_0 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
4 0 nviLouver_0 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
5 0 nviProtect_0 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
6 0 nvoOnOff_0 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
7 0 nvoMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
8 0 nvoSetPoint_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
9 0 nvoFanSpeed_0 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
10 0 nvoLouver_0 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
11 0 nvoAlarmDescr_0 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription.
3rdbyte0.12 0 nvoInletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC13 0 nvoOutletTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
14 1 nviOnOff_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
15 1 nviMode_1 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
16 1 nviSetPoint_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
17 1 nviFanSpeed_1 SNVT_switch 95 FanspeedsettingByte1:Value1:Low,
Value2:Middle,Value3:HighByte2:State0(Fixed)
18 1 nviLouver_1 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
19 1 nviProtect_1 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
20 1 nvoOnOff_1 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
21 1 nvoMode_1 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
22 1 nvoSetPoint_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
23 1 nvoFanSpeed_1 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
24 1 nvoLouver_1 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
25 1 nvoAlarmDescr_1 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription.
3rdbyte0.26 1 nvoInletTemp_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC27 1 nvoOutletTemp_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
Tab. 7 HARC-BX(B) file variables list (continued on the next page)
General details
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
(continued from the previous page)
28 2 nviOnOff_2 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
29 2 nviMode_2 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
30 2 nviSetPoint_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
31 2 nviFanSpeed_2 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
32 2 nviLouver_2 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
33 2 nviProtect_2 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
34 2 nvoOnOff_2 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
35 2 nvoMode_2 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
36 2 nvoSetPoint_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
37 2 nvoFanSpeed_2 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
38 2 nvoLouver_2 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
39 2 nvoAlarmDescr_2 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription.
3rdbyte0.40 2 nvoInletTemp_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC41 2 nvoOutletTemp_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
42 3 nviOnOff_3 SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Allowanintervalofatleast5sec.between2consecutiveorderstoanyunitonaH-Link
43 3 nviMode_3 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
44 3 nviSetPoint_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
45 3 nviFanSpeed_3 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
46 3 nviLouver_3 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
47 3 nviProtect_3 SNVT_switch 95 RemotecontrolorderenabledByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0:RCSenabled
State1:RCSdisabled
48 3 nvoOnOff_3 SNVT_state 83 ON/OFFstateandalarmnotification32bits:bit0:0(STOP)/1(RUN)bit1:0(Normal)/1(Alarm)
Approximateupdatetimeof80sec.
49 3 nvoMode_3 SNVT_hvac_mode 108 Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)5=HVAC_PRE_COOL(Dehumidification)9=HVAC_FAN_ONLY(Ventilation)
50 3 nvoSetPoint_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:1700~3000=17~30ºC
51 3 nvoFanSpeed_3 SNVT_switch 95 Fanspeedsetting
Byte1:Value1:Low,Value2:Middle,Value3:High
Byte2:State0(Fixed)
52 3 nvoLouver_3 SNVT_switch 95 LouversettingByte1:Value0:20,1:25,2:30,3:35,4:45,
5:55,6:70,7:AutoByte2:State0(Fixed)
53 3 nvoAlarmDescr_3 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmdescription31Bytes:First2bytealarmdescription
3rdbyte0.54 3 nvoInletTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Indoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC55 3 nvoOutletTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperaturereading 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC56 Outdoor nvoAmbientTemp SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturereadingsetting 2Bytes:-6200~12700=-62~127ºC
57 Outdoor nviAllOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OfforderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN58 nciMaxSendTime 107 Theuseof
standardvaluesisrecommended(donotchange)
59 nciMinSendTime 107
60 nciPwrUp 107
Tab. 7 HARC-BX(B) XIF file variables list
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.2. Installation
4.1.2.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- DO NOT handle the remote control with wet hands.- DO NOT spill water on the remote control. This may cause an electric shock.- If the safety devices should be activated too often or the buttons do not work properly, turn off the unit at the
mains and contact your HITACHI service provider.- In the event of other incidents of an electrical nature, turn off the system, switch it off at the mains and contact
your HITACHI service provider.
$ CAUTION
- DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or any wiring in the following locations: - Where there are oil vapours and the oil is dispersed. - In the proximity of hot water or heat sources or in sulphuric environments. - In locations prone to the generation, accumulation, leakage or flow of flammable gas. - Close to the sea (saline atmospheres). - In acidic or alkaline environments. - Within the reach of children. - Directly in front of the air-conditioning system outlet.- To avoid electromagnetic compatibility problems, DO NOT install the indoor unit, outdoor unit, remote control or
any wiring within 3m of strong sources of electromagnetic radiation (e.g. waves generated by medical equipment). If the system should be installed in a location where electromagnetic waves are produced, protect the remote control and wiring by covering them with the steel casing and passing the cable through the metal duct.
- If electrical noise should be generated at the indoor unit power source, install a noise filter.
4.1.2.2. Installation site selection
NOTE
- Bear in mind the safety summary warnings when selecting the installation site.- The installation site should be located in a place with an earthing connection.
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.2.3. Installation procedure
1. Install the HARC-BX E, placing the screwed terminal board on the right-hand side.
Upperview Sideview
Lower Horizontalinstallation
OK X OK
Correct Incorrect Correct
Fig. 6
2. Fix the HARC-BX E to the wall with 4 M4 field supply screws.
Fig. 7
4.1.2.4. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
- All wiring work must be done in accordance with local regulations and the instructions of the electricity company.- A qualified electrician should carry out the electrical wiring.- Adjust the electrical leakage detector switch in accordance with local regulations.
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
I. Type of wiring
1. The wiring for the HARC-BX E depends on the components connected. The HARC-BX E should be installed between the power supply, the monitoring equipment, the mono bloc air conditioning and the earthing connection.
2. Wiring methodAC100/240VPowersource
HARC-BXE
Monitoringequipment
Monoblocairconditioning Monoblocairconditioning
Fig. 8
No. Connection equipment Wiring specifications
Powersupplywiring AC100/240V2mm2shieldedwith2cores
Earthingcable Accordingtolocalregulations
Monitoringequipmentwiring LonWork*networkcable
Signalcablebetweenunits1P-0.75mm2shieldedpairortwistedandshieldedpaircable
*LonWorknetworkcable:UsethecablerecommendedbyEchelonCo.,Ltd.andfollowthemonitoringequipmentmanufacturer'sinstructions.
Tab. 8
NOTE
For further information, consult the manual supplied by Echelon Co., Ltd. “FTT·10A transceiver user guide”.
By way of a reference for the user, the following table describes the types of signal cables and their characteristics.
CableCable
diameter/ AWG
Electrical resistanceW/
Km
Capacitance hF/Km
% Vprop of the speed of
lightBelden85102,one/twistedpair,numberofcores19/29,withoutshielding,150ºC
1.3mm/16 28 56 62
Belden8471,one/twistedpair,numberofcores19/29,withoutshielding,60ºC
1.3mm/16 28 72 55
LevelVI22AWG,twistedpair,onecore,withoutshielding 0.65mm/22 106 49 67
JY(St)Y2×2×0.8,onecore,shielded,spiral4cabletwisted 0.8mm/20.4 73 98 41
TIA568ACategory5,24AWQ,twistedpair 0.51mm/24 168 46 58
Tab. 9
NOTE
If a shielded cable is used, it should be connected via a metal film resistor, with a rating of 470 kW 1/4 W (vatios), and a tolerance of less than 10% to prevent the generation of static charges.
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
II. Electrical wiring connection
1. Turn off the main electric switch connected to the cable of the HARC-BX E in order to connect the cable.
2. Wire in accordance with the following table.
Section No. *
Wiring method Comments
Electricpowerline
100/240VHARC-BXEpowersupply
Earthingwire
Controlcircuit
HARC-BXEuppermonitoring
equipment Nonpolar
HARC-BXEMonoblocairconditioning
Nonpolar
*“No.”indicatesthecableforthe"Wiringtype”.
Tab. 10
III. Installation of the PCB plates and the H-LINK terminals
There are 8 PCBs in each HARC-BX E that correspond to the unit's H-LINK terminals as shown in the following figure.
So that the PCBs can communicate and control the assigned units, they should be connected to the H-LINK corresponding to the circuit where the unit is.
AC100-240
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LN
HARC-BXE
H-LINK
HITACHIBMSInterface
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Fig. 9
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
IV. DIP switch adjustment
The DIP switches are inside the central HARC-BX E control between the terminal board and the PCBs. The first column of DIP switches (S201) are used to programme the numbers of the outdoor units and indoor units, and the second column of DIP switches (S202) are used to programme the master and slave controls.
There are two group of 8 DIP switches, which relate to the PCBs, the first line of DIPs with the first PCB and so on.
NOTE
The DIP switches are all deactivated before they are sent from the factory.
1. Configure the DIP switches before turning the power supply on.2. Remove the front board to the configure the DIP switches.3. Each board's DIP switch configuration is different.�. Set the 8 pin DIP switch (S201).
The first four pins of the 8 pin DIP switch (S201) are used to set the outdoor unit and the second four pins are used to set the indoor units controlled by the PCB.
The setting procedure for the outdoor unit number and indoor unit number can be seen in the following table.
8 pin DIP switch setting (S201)
Description
ON12345678
No. OU No. IU
The8pinDIPswitch(S201)settingisdeterminedbythenumbersoftheoutdoorunits(OU)andthenumbersofthecorrespondingindoorunits(IU)controlledbythePCB.
Tab. 11
The following table explains how to programme the outdoor unit numbers. Up to 1� numbers can be programmed:
OU No.
Pin settingOU No.
Pin settingOU No.
Pin settingOU No.
Pin setting
0 ON12345678 4 ON12345678 8 ON12345678 12 ON12345678
1 ON12345678 5 ON12345678 9 ON12345678 13 ON12345678
2 ON12345678 6 ON12345678 10 ON12345678 14 ON12345678
3 ON12345678 7 ON12345678 11 ON12345678 15 ON12345678
Tab. 12
The following table explains how to programme the numbers of the indoor units controlled for each board:
HARC-BX (A) HARC-BX (B)
Indoor units Pin setting Indoor units Pin setting
from0to7(8IU) ON12345678
from0to3(4IU) ON12345678
from4to7(4IU) ON12345678
from8to15(8IU) ON12345678
from8to11(4IU) ON12345678
from12to15(4IU) ON12345678
Tab. 13
Installation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
The position of the switch indicates the address of the first indoor unit for this group of 8 units in the case of the HARC-BX(A) or the first indoor unit for the group of 4 units in the case of the HARC-BX(B).Only the address indicated in the table above can be used for each group.
5. Set the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) The 8 pin DIP switch (S202) is used as follows:
Boardnotactivated
ON12345678
ActivatetheboardtocontrolagivennumberofindoorunitsbasedonS201
ON12345678
Boardactiveasslave
ON12345678
Boardactivemaster(onlyoneboardcanbeamasterboardoneachH-Linkline)
ON12345678
TestModefortheactivatedboard(seesection4.1.3.1forfurtherdetails)
ON12345678
V. DIP programming example:
The following diagram shows an example for connecting a HARC-BX(B) on an installation:
OU0 IU00 IU01 IU02
IU03 IU04 IU05
OU1
IU00
OU2(OU3)
IU00 IU01 IU02
IU03 IU04 IU05
IU06 IU07 IU08
IU09 IU10 IU11
IU12 IU13 IU14
IU15 IU00 IU01
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LN
HARC-BX
OURefnº
IUAdd.
MasterSlave
NoUtilizaMaster
board
Slaveboards
H-Linkconnection
Fig. 10
Operation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.3. Operation
4.1.3.1. Test mode
1. Check that all the “Wiring connection” and “DIP switch adjustment” procedures have been carried out. 2. Turn the power supply by following the procedure below:
-Pluginthemonoblocairconditioning.-PlugtheHARC-BXEin.
�. Check the HARC-BX E connection.
The7-segmentdisplaywillchange,asshowninthefollowingtable,whentheHARC-BXEhasbeenpluggedin.Checkthe7-segmentdisplay.
Step7-segment
displayStatus
1 - Off
2 88 End of system initialization
3 22 Checking the monobloc air conditioning, number of connected remote controls
4 00 Normal transmission between the HARC-BX E and the monobloc air conditioning.
Tab. 14
4. Check the number of identified Indoor Units. The number of Indoor Units identified by the HARC-BX E will be shown on the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW [M.CLR]) button on the HARC-BX E. With the 7-segment display indicating ”00”. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Indoor Units).
5. When the recognisable indoor units have been located, check the Indoor Unit system numbers and the unit numbers that the HARC-BX E has identified. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position. All the system and unit numbers of the recognisable Indoor Units will be shown in the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW[M.CLR] button on the HARC-BX E. If multiple Indoor Units are identified, the system and unit numbers for the identified Indoor Units will be shown sequentially every time the (PSW[CLR]) button is pressed. The system numbers will appear on the left-hand side of the 7-segment display and the unit numbers on the right-hand side. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Indoor Units).
PressM.CLR
PressM.CLR
PressM.CLR
PressM.CLR
NºU.E. NºU.I.
Fig. 11
8 pin DIP switch setting (S202)
ON12345678
Operation
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
7-segment display
Description7-segment
displayDescription
7-segment display
Description7-segment
displayDescription
0OUno.01orIU
no.01 OUno.05orIU
no.05 8OUno.09orIU
no.09 COUno.13orIU
no.13
OUno.02orIU
no.02 OUno.06orIU
no.06 OUno.10orIU
no.10 dOUno.14orIU
no.14
2OUno.03orIU
no.03 OUno.07orIU
no.07 AOUno.11orIU
no.11 eOUno.15orIU
no.15
OUno.04orIU
no.04 OUno.08orIU
no.08 OUno.12orIU
no.12 FOUno.16orIU
no.16
Tab. 15
�. Put pin no. 2 of the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position when all the checks are completed.
Thetestmodeiscomplete.
8 pin DIP switch setting (S202)
ON12345678
4.1.3.2. BMS connection
Take the following points into account for the correct connection of the BMS:
-Thecorrectelectricwiringasindicatedinprevioussections. -TheBMSprotocol ·TheBMSshouldupdateitshardwareviaLonWorksasshownpreviously. -BMSstartup: ·PresstheLON.SERVbutton:
MCLR LON- SERV.AC AC E
LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK
LON H-LINKLON H-LINK
Fig. 12
Whenthisbuttonispressed,theHARC-BXEsendsthe“NeuronChipID”identification. ·ThecommunicationstartsatthatmomentandtheBMScanreadandreceiveorders. ·BMStroubleshootingistheresponsibilityoftheBMSitself.
4.1.3.3. Indication of abnormal conditions
1. Abnormal conditions will be displayed on the 7-segment display of the HARC-BX E.
7-segment display Phenomenon Type of abnormal condition
Abnormal initial connection. No remote control has been found (connection fault).
Abnormal transmission on the remote control.
There has been no response 70 seconds after the attempted transmission to the remote control.
Abnormal transmission on the remote control.
There has been no response 180 seconds after the attempted transmission to the remote control.
Tab. 16
Maintenance and repair
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.4. Maintenance and repair
4.1.4.1. HARC-BX E self-check
The self-check, used to identify any abnormal conditions which may occur in the HARC-BX E, can be carried out with the following procedures:
1. Connect the power supply leaving the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position. “88appears on the 7-segment display and turns off).
ON123456788pinDSW(S202)
2. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON123456780 E
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
3. Put8pinDIPswitch(201)pinno.1intheOFFpositionandthenplaceonlypinno.2intheONposition.(ThisactionshouldbecarriedoutwhilstalsoconfiguringtheterminationresistanceoftheterminalontheH-Link).
7-segmentdisplay
ON12345678 20 2E
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 2 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON123456780*
8pinDSW(S201)
*ThetotalnumberofpinsintheONpositionoutofpinnumbers1to5ofthe8pinDIPswitch(S202)willbeshownontheright-handsideofthedisplay,andanumber“3”willappearontheleft-handsideofthedisplay.
5. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. � in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON12345678- 88
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
Maintenance and repair
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
250TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.4.2. Troubleshooting
The following table shows the possible troubleshooting actions to be carried out in the event of unit malfunction. Make sure that the power supply is disconnected before starting any check.
No. Phenomenon Check points Action
1
TheHARC-BXEdoesnotstartupalthoughthepowersupplyis
turnedon.(Noindicationinthe7-segmentdisplay).
Checkthattheelectricitycableisconnected. Connecttheelectricitycable.
Checkthatitsupplieselectricity.Measurethepowersupplyvoltage.Ifthevoltagemeasurementexceedsthenormalrangeof100~240±10%[V],thewiringsystemsandproceduresshouldbeinspectedandexamined.
Checkifthepowersupplyisturnedon(PWRsON).Ifthepilotlightisofftheremaybeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.
Checkwhetherthescrewsonthepowersupplyareloose. Tightenthem.
CheckiftheLED(PWRortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemswiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckifthemonoblocairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checktheuppertransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheuppertransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)isflashingatregularintervals(from1to2sec.).
Theflashingindicatesthattherecouldbeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.
2
TheHARC-BXEdoesnotidentifytheairconditioningeven
thoughthepowersupplyison.
(“”appearsonthe7-segmentdisplay).
Afterthe“00”indicationonthe
7-segmentscreenwithtestmode,theactualamountofairconditioningunits
doesnotmatchwiththeseaddresses.
CheckiftheHARC-BXE(OP)DIPswitchesarecorrectlyconfigured.
TheDIPswitchmustbeconfiguredagainaspersection4.1.4.1oftheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandoperationmanualonhowtoconfiguretheHARC-BXEDIPswitch.
Checkiftheairconditioningsystemandaddressarecorrectlyconfigured.
Theaddressshouldbeconfiguredagainasindicatedintheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanual.
Checkifthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.
Examinethecableconnection.
Checkifthetransmissioncablespecifiedbythemanufacturerhasbeenusedtoconnecttotheairconditioningunits.
Useashieldedcableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).
Checkifthetransmissioncableconnectedtotheairconditioningisconnectedtothepowersupplycable.
Leaveaminimumspaceof150mmbetweencables.
Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitiscorrectlyconfigured.
Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150Ω).
Checkifthetransmissioncircuitoperatesnormallywiththeself-checkfunction.
Theterminationresistanceshouldbeconfiguredinrelationtotheairconditioningtransmissioncable.
Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningshouldbeintheONposition.Checkifthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.
Examinethecableconnection.
CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayisoff.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
3The7-segment
displayshows“”.
Checkifthetransmissioncablespecifiedbythemanufacturerhasbeenusedtoconnecttotheairconditioningunits.
Useashieldedcableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).
Checkifthetransmissioncableconnectedtotheairconditioningisconnectedtothepowersupplycable.
Leaveaminimumspaceof150mmbetweencables.
Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsiscorrectlyconfigured.
Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150 Ω).
Checkifthetransmissioncircuitoperatesnormallywiththeself-checkfunction.
Theterminationresistanceshouldbeconfiguredinrelationtotheairconditioningtransmissioncable.
Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningunitshouldbesettotheONposition.
Tab. 17
Maintenance and repair
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
251TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
4.1.4.3. Periodic inspection
The unit should be periodically inspected with the aim of guaranteeing a reliable performance and long-lasting operation.
1. Ambient conditions: - Make sure that the internal temperature of the housing panel is not too high. - Make sure that the temperature of the unit housing is not too high. - Check if there is any dust or fine metal powder and, if so, remove it. Check the lubrication.
2. Displays: - Check if the run indicator LED of the power supply (PWR) is on. - Check that the run indicator for the transmission display (H-L, LON) indicates ON/OFF. - Check if the 7-segment display shows digits other than “00”.
�. Assembly and connection parts: - Check that the screws for the assembly, power supply, transmission cable and all other screws are correctly tightened.
$ WARNING
Do�not�use�acidic�cleaning�agents,�such�as�solvents,�to�clean�the�units.�They�could�remove�the�colour�from�the�coating�surfaces�and�melt�the�plastic�box.
HARC-BX E
Technical catalogue
252TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-BX E
Table of contents
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.2. HARC-70CE1.........................................................................................255
4.2.1. Generaldetails.......................................................................................255
4.2.1.1.Selectionadvantages.........................................................................................2554.2.1.2.Maintenanceadvantages...................................................................................2554.2.1.3.Systemconfiguration..........................................................................................256
4.2.2. Installation..............................................................................................262
4.2.2.1.Safetysummary..................................................................................................2624.2.2.2.Installationsiteselection.....................................................................................2624.2.2.3.Installationprocedure.........................................................................................2634.2.2.4.Electricalconnection..........................................................................................263
4.2.3. Operation................................................................................................265
4.2.3.1.Checkmode.......................................................................................................2654.2.3.2.Indicationofabnormalconditions.......................................................................265
4.2.4. Maintenanceandrepair..........................................................................266
4.2.4.1.HARC-70CE1(OP)self-check.........................................................................2664.2.4.2.Troubleshooting.................................................................................................2674.2.4.3.Periodicinspection.............................................................................................268
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
255TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2. HARC-70CE1
4.2.1. General details
4.2.1.1. Selection advantages
I. General features
- The different systems within buildings such as lights, alarms, air conditioning, ..., can be fully controlled by just one BMS.
- Gateway interface with BMS LonWorks® systems (installations with intelligent control or BMS).
- With the HARC-70CE1 connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and 7 monitoring points of up to � chillers.
- With the HARC-70CE1 OP connection to a H-LINK network, it is possible to control � setting points and up to �� monitoring points of one chiller unit.
II. Remote control compatibility
This remote control can be connected to the following water chiller units:
Series-G2 Series-G1 Series-GRCUE-40AG2 RHUE-40AG2 RCUE-40WG2 RCUE-40AG1 RCUE-40AG RHUE-40AG RCUE-40WG RCUE-40CLG
RCUE-50AG2 RHUE-50AG2 RCUE-50WG2 RCUE-50AG1 RCUE-50AG RHUE-50AG RCUE-50WG RCUE-50CLG
RCUE-60AG2 RHUE-60AG2 RCUE-60WG2 RCUE-60AG1 RCUE-60AG RHUE-60AG RCUE-60WG RCUE-60CLG
RCUE-70AG2 RHUE-70AG2
RCUE-80AG2 RHUE-80AG2 RCUE-80WG2 RCUE-80AG1 RCUE-80AG RHUE-80AG RCUE-80WG RCUE-80CLG
RCUE-100AG2 RHUE-100AG2 RCUE-100WG2 RCUE-100AG1 RCUE-100AG RHUE-100AG RCUE-100WG RCUE-100CLG
RCUE-120AG2 RHUE-120AG2 RCUE-120WG2 RCUE-120AG1 RCUE-120AG RHUE-120AG RCUE-120WG RCUE-120CLG
RCUE-140AG2 RHUE-140AG2 RCUE-140AG1 RCUE-140AG
RCUE-150WG2 RCUE-150AG1 RCUE-150AG RCUE-150WG
RCUE-160AG2 RHUE-160AG2
RCUE-180AG2 RHUE-180AG2 RCUE-180WG2 RCUE-180AG1 RCUE-180AG RCUE-180WG
RCUE-210AG2 RHUE-210AG2 RCUE-200WG2 RCUE-200AG1 RCUE-200AG RCUE-200WG
RCUE-240AG2 RHUE-240AG2 RCUE-240WG2 RCUE-240AG1 RCUE-240AG RCUE-240WG
RCUE-270AG1 RCUE-270AG
RCUE-280AG2* RCUE-300AG1 RCUE-300AG
RCUE-320AG2*
RCUE-330AG1 RCUE-330AG
RCUE-360AG2* RCUE-360AG1 RCUE-360AG
RCUE-400AG2* RCUE-400AG1 RCUE-400AG
Tab. 1* These units can only be connected to HARC-70CE1, and are not compatible with the HARC-70CE1 OP version.
4.2.1.2. Maintenance advantages
The HARC-70CE1 (OP) remote controls offer the option of self-checking their own status.
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.1.3. System configuration
The following figure shows the internal configuration of the BMS connection used by the HARC-70CE1.This manual describes the HARC-70CE1 in terms of the rest of equipment necessary to assemble the system, see the enclosed installation manual.
Monitoringequipment
LonWorks
HARC-70CE1
Chillerunit2
Chillerunit3
Chillerunit4
Chillerunit1
Monitoringequipment
HARC-70CE1OP
Chillerunit1
LonWorks
* LonWorks® is the registered trademark of Echelon Corporation in the USA and other countries
Fig. 1
$ CAUTION
Make sure that the shielded cable is earthed.
I. Control panel components
MCLR LON- SERV.AC AC E
LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK
LON H-LINKLON H-LINK
Fig. 2
Power supply terminal: AC220~2�0V grid connection.
Earth terminal: HARC-70CE1 terminal earth connection.
PSW (Push Switch) No. 1 (M.CLR): Press the button to check the quantity of connected units.
7-segment display (1*): This indicates the current HARC-70CE1 status.
¥ PSW No. 2 (LON-SERV): Press the button (PSW) to transmit the Neuron ID. (Service pin).
¦ 8P DSW (DIP Switch) No. 1 (S201) (2*): Setting the system of HARC-70CE1 DIP switches.
§ 8P DSW No. 2 (S202) (�*): DIP switch (DSW) for setting the functions of the HARC-70CE1.
¨ Terminals to connect the LonWorks transmission line.
© Terminals to connect water chiller units.
(1*) 7-segment display: Read the “Check mode” and “Indication of abnormal conditions” sections for details on the 7-segment display.(2*) 8P DSW No. 1 S201: Read the “DIP switch setting” section for further information and for HARC-70CE1 functions.(3*) 8P DSW No. 2.S202: Read the “DIP switch adjustment” section. 8P DSW No. 1 and No. 2 are used for the self-check. For further
details, refer to the “HARC-70CE1 self-check” section.
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
257TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
II. HARC-70CE1 (OP) Specifications
■ Hardware specifications
Element Specification
Powersupply AC240V±10%(50/60Hz)
Energyconsumption 10W(max.)
Externaldimensions Width:170mm,height:75mm,depth:80mm(Installedinsidethebox)
Weight 0.6kg
Installationconditions Indoor
Temperatureconditions 0~45°C
Humidityconditions 10~80%(Nodew)
Tab. 2
■ Telecommunications specifications for water chillers
Element Specification
Communicationunit Waterchillers
Communicationscable Nonpolar,twistedandshielded2cablesystem
Telecommunicationssystem Half-duplextelecommunications
Synchronoussystem Asynchronouscommunicationsystem
Telecommunicationsspeed 9,600bps
Cablelength 1,000m(totallength)
ConnectionquantityHARC-70CE1type:Maximumof4chilleraddressesHARC-70CE1OPtype:Maximumof1chilleraddress
Tab. 3
■ Telecommunication specifications for the upper system
Element Specification
Communicationunit Uppermonitoringequipment
Transmissionprotocol LonTalk(*)protocol
Accessmethod PersistentCSMA/CDsystemplanned
Codingsystem DifferentialManchesterCode
Telecommunicationsspeed 78,000bps
Maximumcablelength 500m(totalbuslength)
(*) “LonTalk” is an “Echelon Corporation” trademark in the USA and other countries.
Tab. 4
III. Communication with LonWorks interface
We have two options for water chillers: · HARC-70CE1 · HARC-70CE1 OP
▲ HARC-70CE1TheHARC-70CE1isaLonWorksinterfacedesignedforcaseswhereonlythecontroloftheunitsisrequiredandthereisnoneedforunitoperationmonitoring.
Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolofupto4waterchilleraddresses
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
258TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
a.HARC-70CE1communicationmode:
Theinterfacecancontrolandmonitorthefollowingvariablesofeachconnectedchiller:
VariablesNetworkvesion1.0A
nviChillerEnable_n
nviCoolSetpt_n
nviMode_n
nviHeatSetpt_n
nvoOnOff_n
11Points/Unit
Configurationproperties
nciMaxSendTimenciMinSendTime
Remote
controlMonitor
x4
nvoActiveSetpt_n
nvoActualCapacity_n*1
nvoLvgCHWT_n*2
nvoEntCHWT_n*3
nvoAlarmDescr_n
nvoChillerStat_n
Fig. 3
b.XIFfilevariables:
Chiller number
Water-cooled
Air-cooled
Air heat pump
SVNTr Chiller
Variable name TypeLONMARK SNVT No.
Description Condition Note
0 O O O nv0 nviChillerEnable_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUNLeaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.
0 O O O nv1 nviCoolSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting
2Bytes:-2000~2500=-20~25ºC
0 O O O nv2 nviMode_0 SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)
0 - - O nv3 nviHeatSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting
2bytes:3000~6000=30~60ºC
0 O O O nv4 nvoOnOff_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffStateByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
0 O O O nv5 nvoActiveSetpt_0 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 - - - nv6 nvoActualCapa_0SNVT_lev_percent(NotAvailable)
81
Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)
Notenabled
0 O O O nv7 nvoLvgCHWTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature
2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 O O O nv8 nvoEntCHWTemp_0 SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature
2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 O O O nv9 nvoAlarmDescr_0 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode
31Bytes:Thefirst4bytesofthealarmdescriptionastheyareexplainedonthechillers.Byte5alwaysat0.Therestareindefinite
0 O O O nv10 nvoChillerStat_0 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus
3bytes:Byte1:ChillerRunMode
0:Chlr_Off(OFFMode)2:Chlr_Run(Runmode)
Byte2:ChillerOperationMode1:HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3:HVAC_COOL(Cooling)A:HVAC_FREE_COOL
(Coolingthermostatoff)Byte3:ChlrState
bit0:0/1(noalarm/alarm)bit1:0/1(startnotavailable/
startavailable)bit2:0/1(central/local)bits3~7:Notenabled
0 - - - nv11 untest_0SNVT_press(Notenabled)
30 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled0 - - - nv12 untest_10 - - - nv13 untest_20 - - - nv14 untest_3
5 HARC-70CE1 XIF file variables list (continued on the next page)
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
25�TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
(continued from the previous page)
1 O O O nv15 nviChlrEnable_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/Offorder Sameasnv0
Leaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.
1 O O O nv16 nviCoolSetpt_1 SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv1
1 O O O nv17 nviMode_1 SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting
Sameasnv2
1 - - O nv18 nviHeatSetpt_1 SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv3
1 O O O nv19 nvoOnOff_1 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffState Sameasnv4 Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
1 O O O nv20 nvoActiveSetpt_1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting Sameasnv5
1 - - - nv21 nvoActualCapa_1SNVT_lev_percent(Notenabled)
81
Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)
Notenabled
1 O O O nv22 nvoLvgCHWTemp_1 SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature
Sameasnv7
1 O O O nv23 nvoEntCHWTemp_1 SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature
Sameasnv8
1 O O O nv24 nvoAlarmDescr_1 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode Sameasnv9
1 O O O nv25 nvoChillerStat_1 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus Sameasnv10
1 - - - nv26 untest_4SNVT_press(Notenabled)
30 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled1 - - - nv27 untest_51 - - - nv28 untest_61 - - - nv29 untest_72 O O O nv30 nviChlrEnable_2 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrder Sameasnv0
Leaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.
2 O O O nv31 nviCoolSetpt_2 SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv1
2 O O O nv32 nviMode_2 SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting
Sameasnv2
2 - - O nv33 nviHeatSetpt_2 SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv3
2 O O O nv34 nvoOnOff_2 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffState Sameasnv4 Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
2 O O O nv35 nvoActiveSetpt_2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting Sameasnv5
2 - - - nv36 nvoActualCapa_2SNVT_lev_percent(Notenabled)
81
Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)
Notenabled
2 O O O nv37 nvoLvgCHWTemp_2 SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature
Sameasnv7
2 O O O nv38 nvoEntCHWTemp_2 SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature
Sameasnv8
2 O O O nv39 nvoAlarmDescr_2 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode Sameasnv9
2 O O O nv40 nvoChillerStat_2 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus Sameasnv10
2 - - - nv41 untest_8SNVT_press(Notenabled)
30
Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled2 - - - nv42 untest_9 302 - - - nv43 untest_10 302 - - - nv44 untest_11 303 O O O nv45 nviChlrEnable_3 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrder Sameasnv0
Leaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.
3 O O O nv46 nviCoolSetpt_3 SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv1
3 O O O nv47 nviMode_3 SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting
Sameasnv2
3 - - O nv48 nviHeatSetpt_3 SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting
Sameasnv3
3 O O O nv49 nvoOnOff_3 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffState Sameasnv4 Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
3 O O O nv50 nvoActiveSetpt_3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting Sameasnv5
3 - - - nv51 nvoActualCapa_3SNVT_lev_percent(Notenabled)
81
Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)
Notenabled
3 O O O nv52 nvoLvgCHWTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature
Sameasnv7
3 O O O nv53 nvoEntCHWTemp_3 SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature
Sameasnv8
3 O O O nv54 nvoAlarmDescr_3 SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode Sameasnv9
3 O O O nv55 nvoChillerStat_3 SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus Sameasnv10
3 - - - nv56 untest_12SNVT_press(Notenabled)
30
Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled3 - - - nv57 untest_13 303 - - - nv58 untest_14 303 - - - nv59 untest_15 30
nv60 nciMaxSendTimenv61 nciMinSendTime
Tab. 5 HARC-70CE1 XIF file variables list
■ HARC-70CE1 OPTheHARC-70CE1OPisaLonWorksinterfacedesignedforcasesthatrequireamoredetailedcontroloftheunits,inadditiontocompleteunitoperationmonitoringfunctions.
Thisinterfaceallowsthecontrolof1waterchilleraddress
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�0TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
Whenthechillerusestwoaddresses,thesecondaddresscannotbecontrolled.Therefore,theuseoftheSTDinterfaceisrecommendedforsuchcases.a.HARC-70CE1OPcommunicationmode: Theinterfacecancontrolandmonitorthefollowingvariablesofeachconnectedchiller:
Networkvariablesversion1.0B
nviChillerEnable_n
nviCoolSetpt_n
nviMode_n
nviHeatSetpt_n
nvoOnOff_n
nvoChillerStat_n18Points/cycle
Configurationproperties
nciMaxSendTimenciMinSendTime
Remote
control Monitor
x6
nvoActiveSetpt_n
nvoActualCapacity_n
nvoLvgCHWT_nnvoEntCHWT_n
nvoAlarmDescr_n
nvoAmbientTemp
nvoLvgCHWT_n
nvoDtemp_nnvoStemp_n
nvoCompStat_nnvoDPress_nnvoSpress_n
Fig. 4
b.XIFfilevariables:
Chiller number
Water-cooled
Air-cooled
Air heat
pump
SVNTr Chiller
Variable name TypeLONMARK SNVT No.
Description Condition Note
0 O O O nv0 nviChillerEnable_0 SNVT_switch 95 On/OffOrderByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUNLeaveanintervalof5secondsormorebetweeneachadjustment.
0 O O O nv1 nviCoolSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105Coldwatertemperaturesetting
2Bytes:-2000~2500=-20~25ºC
0 O O O nv2 nviMode SNVT_hvac_mode 108Operationmodesetting
1byte:1=HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3=HVAC_COOL(Cooling)
0 - - O nv3 nviHeatSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105Hotwatertemperaturesetting
2bytes:3000~6000=30~60ºC
0 O O O nv4 nvoOnOff SNVT_switch 95 On/OffStateByte1:Value0(Fixed)Byte2:State0=STOP
State1=RUN
Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
0 O O O nv5 nvoActiveSetpt SNVT_temp_p 105 Temperaturesetting 2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 - - - nv6 nvoActualCapaSNVT_lev_percent(NotAvailable)
81Operationcapacity(Notusedincontinuouscapacity)
Notenabled
0 O O O nv7 nvoLvgCHWTemp SNVT_temp_p 105Chilleroutlettemperature
2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 O O O nv8 nvoEntCHWTemp SNVT_temp_p 105Chillerinlettemperature
2Bytes:-2000~6000=-20~60ºC
0 O O O nv9 nvoAlarmDescr SNVT_str_asc 36 Alarmcode
31Bytes:Thefirst4bytesofthealarmdescriptionastheyareexplainedonthechillers.Byte5alwaysat0.Therestareindefinite
0 O O O nv10 nvoChillerStat SNVT_chlr_status 127 Chillerstatus
3bytes:Byte1:ChillerRunMode
0:Chlr_Off(OFFMode)2:Chlr_Run(Runmode)
Byte2:ChillerOperationMode1:HVAC_HEAT(Heating)3:HVAC_COOL(Cooling)A:HVAC_FREE_COOL
(Coolingthermostatoff)Byte3:ChlrState
bit0:0/1(noalarm/alarm)bit1:0/1(startnotavailable/
startavailable)bit2:0/1(central/local)bits3~7:Notenabled
0 n11 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure1 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n12 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure2 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n13 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure3 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa0 n14 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure4 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
6 HARC-70CE1 XIF OP file variables list (continued on the next page)
General details
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�1TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
(continued from the previous page)
0 n15 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure5 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
Thesevaluesareupdatedevery60seconds.WhentheHARCdetectsmodifications,itdoesnotwait60secondstoupdatethem.Iftherearenochillersconnected,thesevaluesaresetto0.
0 n16 nvoDpress1 SNVT_press 30 Dischargepressure6 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n17 nvoSpress1 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure1 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n18 nvoSpress2 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure2 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n19 nvoSpress3 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure3 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n20 nvoSpress4 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure4 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n21 nvoSpress5 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure5 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n22 nvoSpress6 SNVT_press 30 Suctionpressure6 2Bytes:0~30000=0~3,000kPa
0 n23 nvoDtemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature1
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n24 nvoDtemp2 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature2
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n25 nvoDtemp3 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature3
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n26 nvoDtemp4 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature4
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n27 nvoDtemp5 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature5
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n28 nvoDtemp6 SNVT_temp_p 105Dischargetemperature6
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n29 nvoSTemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature12Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n30 nvoSTemp2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature22Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n31 nvoSTemp3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature32Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n32 nvoSTemp4 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature42Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n33 nvoSTemp5 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature52Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n34 nvoSTemp6 SNVT_temp_p 105 Suctiontemperature62Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n35 nvoODtemp SNVT_temp_p 105 Outdoortemperature2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n36 nvoCompOnOff1 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n37 nvoCompOnOff2 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n38 nvoCompOnOff3 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n39 nvoCompOnOff4 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n40 nvoCompOnOff5 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n41 nvoCompOnOff6 SNVT_statex16 83Compressorinformation
32Bytes:Byte1:b0:0/1=STOP/RUN
0 n42 nvoLvgCHWTemp1 SNVT_temp_p 105Wateroutlettemperature1
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n43 nvoLvgCHWTemp2 SNVT_temp_p 105Wateroutlettemperature2
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n44 nvoLvgCHWTemp3 SNVT_temp_p 105Wateroutlettemperature3
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n45 nvoLvgCHWTemp4 SNVT_temp_p 105Watertemperatureattherearofthechiller1
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n46 nvoLvgCHWTemp5 SNVT_temp_p 105Watertemperatureattherearofthechiller2
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n47 nvoLvgCHWTemp6 SNVT_temp_p 105Watertemperatureattherearofthechiller3
2Bytes:-12700~12700=-127~127ºC
0 n48 unused1 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n49 unused2 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n50 unused3 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n51 unused4 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n52 unused5 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n53 unused6 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n54 unused7 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n55 unused8 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
0 n56 unused9 SNVT_temp_p 105 Notenabled Notenabled Notenabled
nv57 nciMaxSendTime
nv58 nciMinSendTime
Tab. 6 HARC-70CE1 OP XIF file variables list
Installation
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�2TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.2. Installation
4.2.2.1. Safety summary
% DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
- Install the HARC in an earthed metal box.- Install a differential circuit-breaker for protection against short circuits on the power supply of the HARC.
$ CAUTION
- If a transmission fault occurs between the HARC and the chiller unit, the chiller will stop. If it is set to manual start, turn the power supply to the chiller off and then on again. Otherwise, the chiller unit will continue to show the transmission alarm and will not be able to start.
- To start the chiller unit up when it has been turned off, send an off order then an on order from the remote control.- Do not define the temperature setting of the chiller, controlled by the HARC, from the control panel. If it is carried
out this way, the temperature is modified and the change is sent to the remote control.- If there is a power failure in the chiller, controlled by the HARC, it may be impossible to recover the conditions that
existed before the fault.- After a power failure, transmit a start up order from the remote control after restoring the power. After a power
failure, transmit a start up order from the remote control after restoring the power.- When transmitting a SNVT from the HARC used by other control devices, a period of two minutes must pass
between the transmission and the chiller reaction.- Do not disconnect the power supply while a SCPT is being used. Even when the maximum sending time has
been exceeded, without having transmitted a SNVT from the HARC with a lower minimum sending value, a SCPT should be transmitted again. Otherwise, the SCPT value remain at “0”.
- If the remote control panel state is changed to local and then to remote again, the temperature setting and control mode should be defined again. Otherwise, the temperature and mode will remain at the chiller's initial values.
- If an abnormal transmission occurs between the control and the HARC, the conditions of the two units may not match. Set the maximum sending time and ensure that the conditions of the control and the HARC are both within said interval.
4.2.2.2. Installation site selection
NOTE
- Bear in mind the safety summary warnings when selecting the installation site.- The installation site should be located in a place with an earthing connection.
▲Spacerequiredfortheinstallation
20 20
5050
Lessthan10
900
Fig. 5
Installation
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.2.3. Installation procedure
1. Install the HARC-70CE1 in an earthed metal box, bearing in mind the following HARC-70CE1 dimensions for the box that it will be installed in.
POW
IRP PACCONTROLSYSTEMG/W
170
162
72 807
75
8IdentificationnumberNEURONCHIPatthebackofthecover
Terminalscover
AfteropeningAfteropening
UP
DOWN
Fig. 6
2. Secure the HARC-70CE1 in accordance with the following instructions, depending on if it is mounted with screws or DIN rails.
Screw mounting DIN rail mounting
170 4
4162
72 (87)2-M4
(170)
40(8
7)
CentralrailDINline
Fig. 7
4.2.2.4. Electrical connection
$ CAUTION
- All wiring work must be done in accordance with local regulations and the instructions of the electricity company.- A qualified electrician should carry out the electrical wiring.- Adjust the electrical leakage detector switch in accordance with local regulations.
Installation
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
I. Type of wiring
1. The HARC-70CE1 should be installed between the power supply, the monitoring equipment, the water chiller and the earthing connection.
2. Wiring methodAC220/240VPowersource
Monitoringequipment
HARC-70CE1
Waterchiller Waterchiller
Fig. 8
No. Connection equipment Wiring specifications
AC220/240Vpowersupplywiring(fieldsupply) 2mm2shielded
Chillersignalcableconnectionwiring,5Vdc(fieldsupply)
0.75mm2Twisted,shieldedpaircablewithamaximumlengthof1000m
Earthingwire(fieldsupply) -
ConnectionwiringbetweentheLonWorkssignalwires,5Vdc(fieldsupply)
-
Tab. 7
II. Electrical wiring connection
1. Turn off the main electric switch connected to the cable of the HARC-70CE1 in order to connect the cable.
2. Wire in accordance with the following table.
Section Wiring method Comments
Electricpowerline
HARC-70CE1220/240Vpower
supply
AC AC E
Earthingwire
AC AC E
Controlcircuit
HARC-70CE1uppermonitoring
equipment
LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK
Nonpolar
HARC-70CE1Chillers
LON / H-LINKLON/H-LINK
Nonpolar
Tab. 8
Operation
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�5TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.3. Operation
4.2.3.1. Check mode
1. Check that all the “Wiring connection” and “DIP switch adjustment” procedures have been carried out.
2. Turn the power supply by following the procedure below:-Powerupthechillerunits.-ThenplugtheHARC-70CE1(OP)in.
�. Check the connection of the HARC-70CE1 (OP).
OncetheHARC-70CE1(OP)hasbeenpluggedinthe7-segmentdisplaywillchange,asshowninthefollowingtable.Checkthe7-segmentdisplay.
Step7-segment
displayStatus
1 -- Off.
2 88 End of system initialisation.
3 22Checking the monobloc air conditioning, number of connected remote control combiners.
4 00 Normal transmission between the HARC-70CE1 (OP) and the water chiller.
Tab. 9
4. Check the number of identified Chiller Units.
The number of identified Chiller Units for the HARC-70CE1 (OP) will be displayed on the 7-segment display after pressing the (PSW [M.CLR]) button on the HARC-70CE1 (OP).
The 7-segment display will indicate ”00”. (Check if this number is the same as the actual number of Chiller Units).
4.2.3.2. Indication of abnormal conditions
1. Abnormal conditions will be displayed on the 7-segment display of the HARC-70CE1.
7-segment display Phenomenon Type of abnormal condition
Abnormalinitialconnection.Noremotecontrollercombinerhasbeenfound(connectionfault).
Abnormaltransmissionontheremotecontrolcombiner.
Therehasbeennoresponse70secondsaftertheremotecontrolattemptedtotransmittothecombiner.
Abnormaltransmissionontheremotecontrolcombiner.
Therehasbeennoresponse180secondsaftertheremotecontrolattemptedtotransmittothecombiner.
Tab. 10
Maintenance and repair
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2��TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.4. Maintenance and repair
4.2.4.1. HARC-70CE 1 (OP) self-check
The self-check, used to identify any abnormal conditions which may occur in the HARC-70CE1 (OP), can be carried out with the following procedures:
1. Connect the power supply leaving the 8 pin DIP switch (S202) in the OFF position.“88” appears on the 7-segment display and turns off).
ON123456788pinDSW(S202)
2. Only put the 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON123456780 E
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 1 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. 2 in the ON position. (This action should be carried out whilst also configuring the termination resistance of the terminal on the H-Link).
7-segmentdisplay
ON1234567820 2E
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
�. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. 2 in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON123456780*
8pinDSW(S201)
*ThetotalnumberofpinsintheONpositionoutofpinnumbers1to5ofthe8pinDIPswitch(S202)willbeshownontheright-handsideofthedisplay,andanumber“3”willappearontheleft-handsideofthedisplay.
5. Put 8 pin DIP switch (201) pin no. � in the OFF position and then place only pin no. � in the ON position.
7-segmentdisplay
ON12345678- 88
8pinDSW(S201) Normal Abnormal
Maintenance and repair
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�7TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.4.2. Troubleshooting
The following table shows the possible troubleshooting actions to be carried out in the event of unit malfunction. Make sure that the power supply is disconnected before starting any check.
No. Phenomenon Check points Action
1
TheHARC-70CE1(OP)doesnotstart
upalthoughthepowersupplyisturnedon.(Noindicationinthe7-segmentdisplay).
Checkthattheelectricitycableisconnected. Connecttheelectricitycable.
Checkthatitsupplieselectricity.Measurethepowersupplyvoltage.Ifthevoltagemeasurementexceedsthenormalrangeof100~240±10%[V],thewiringsystemsandproceduresshouldbeinspectedandexamined.
Checkifthepowersupplyisturnedon(PWRsON).Ifthepilotlightisofftheremaybeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre.
Checkwhetherthescrewsonthepowersupplyareloose. Tightenthem.
CheckiftheLED(PWRortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checkthetransmissioncircuitoftheairconditioningsystemswiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckifthemonoblocairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)ison.Checktheuppertransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheuppertransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(LONortransmissiondisplay)isflashingatregularintervals(from1to2sec.).
Theflashingindicatesthattherecouldbeafaultintheinternalpowersupply.Contactyournearestservicecentre
2
TheHARC-70CE1(OP)
doesnotidentifytheairconditioningeven
thoughthepowersupplyison.(“”appearsonthe7-segmentdisplay).
Afterthe“00”indicationonthe
7-segmentscreenwithtestmode,theactualamountofairconditioningunits
doesnotmatchwiththeseaddresses.
CheckiftheHARC-70CE1(OP)DIPswitchesarecorrectlyconfigured.
TheDIPswitchmustbeconfiguredagainaspersection4.2.4.1oftheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanualonhowtoconfiguretheHARC-70CE1(OP)DIPswitch.
Checkiftheairconditioningsystemandaddressarecorrectlyconfigured.
Theaddressshouldbeconfiguredagainasindicatedintheinstallationandmaintenancemanualandtheoperationmanual.
Checkifthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.
Examinethecableconnection.
Checkifthetransmissioncablespecifiedbythemanufacturerhasbeenusedtoconnecttotheairconditioningunits.
Useashieldedpaircableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).
Checkifthetransmissioncableconnectedtotheairconditioningisconnectedtothepowersupplycable.
Leaveaminimumspaceof150mmbetweencables.
Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncabletotheairconditioningunitiscorrectlyconfigured.
Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150Ω).
Checkifthetransmissioncircuitoperatesnormallywiththeself-checkfunction.
Theterminationresistanceshouldbeconfiguredinrelationtotheairconditioningtransmissioncable.
Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningshouldbeintheONposition.Checkifthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsisdisconnected.
Examinethecableconnection.
CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayison.Checktheairconditioning'stransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally.
CheckiftheLED(H-L)ofthetransmissiondisplayisoff.Checktheairconditioning'stransmissioncircuitwiththeself-checkfunction.Thencheckiftheairconditioningtransmissioncircuitisoperatingnormally
3The7-segment
displayshows“”.
Checkifthetransmissioncablespecifiedbythemanufacturerhasbeenusedtoconnecttotheairconditioningunits.
Useashieldedpaircableortwistedandshieldedpaircable(0.75mm2).
Checkifthetransmissioncableconnectedtotheairconditioningisconnectedtothepowersupplycable.
Leaveaminimumspaceof150mmbetweencables.
Checkiftheterminationresistanceoftheterminalandthenumberofthetransmissioncablebetweentheairconditioningunitsiscorrectlyconfigured.
Onlyoneterminationresistanceshouldonlybeconfiguredononesystem.(Theresistancebetweencablesisapprox.150▲).
Checkifthetransmissioncircuitoperatesnormallywiththeself-checkfunction.
Theterminationresistanceshouldbeconfiguredinrelationtotheairconditioningtransmissioncable.
Checkiftheairconditioning'spowersupplyisON. TheairconditioningunitshouldbesettotheONposition.
Tab. 11
HARC-70CE1
Technical catalogue
2�8TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
HARC-70CE1
4.2.4.3. Periodic inspection
The unit should be periodically inspected with the aim of guaranteeing a reliable performance and long-lasting operation.
1. Ambient conditions: - Make sure that the internal temperature of the housing panel is not too high. - Make sure that the temperature of the unit housing is not too high. - Check if there is any dust or fine metal powder and, if so, remove it. Check the lubrication. 2. Displays: - Check if the run indicator LED of the power supply (PWR) is on. - Check that the run indicator for the transmission display (H-L, LON) indicates ON/OFF. - Check if the 7-segment display shows digits other than “00”.
�. Assembly and connection parts: - Check that the screws for the assembly, power supply, transmission cable and all other screws are correctly tightened.
$ WARNING
Do�not�use�acidic�cleaning�agents,�such�as�solvents,�to�clean�the�units.�They�could�remove�the�colour�from�the�coating�surfaces�and�melt�the�plastic�box.
Maintenance and repair
CSC-5S
Catálogo técnico
Printed in España.TCGB0050-rev.0 - 02/2008
Hitachi Air Conditioning Products (M) Sdn. Lot No. 10, Jalan Kemajan Banji Industrial Estate
���50 Bandar Baru Bangi, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia Certification ISO 9001, Malaysia
Hitachi Appliances, Inc. Shimizu-shi, Shizuoka-ken, Japan ISO 9001Certified by JQA, Japan
ISO 14001 Certified by JQA, Japan
Hitachi Air Conditioning Products Europe, S.A. Ronda Shimizu, 1-Políg. Ind. Can Torrella
082�� Vacarisses (Barcelona) España ISO 9001 Certified by AENOR, Spain
Hitachi is participating in the EUROVENT Certification Programme.
Products are as specified in the EUROVENT Directory of Certified.